Google This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world’s books discoverable online. It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover. Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you. Usage guidelines Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you: + Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes. + Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. + Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. + Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. About Google Book Search Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web atthtto: //books.gqoogle.com/ TT JkVOX [eI BRARY Duuckinck Collection. Presented tn (878. cr TOANSFon Frit LENQA, ® ° ~ *. we” 2 wen Te at NM oe BO ee ee cS . - ee we fy C04 very 3 Sacte cree f ne Cy o 7 KA FOR» "0 C.. - OPE: ee —e ~ — Ce fA. —_ | ~ aes. e om GAT Ati #: OO wa foe Ife. Ll Ac Eee we ta oar poe: i oe bats ae ? J oO OU Tye Tee / 0. > FG oe _7e TO 7 7 C+ CH 7270 FOR, Fer? Of at (EO mae Oo Week TSI a Ft e HgIoyoyrper Oe ee FoF naires tee Woe. ee se + tn A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, FOR THE USE GF SCHOOLS ‘AND COLLEGES. Sos, 4 CHARLES ANTHON, LLD., JAY-PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NBW-YORKE, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL. NEW-YORK: HARPER & BROTHERS, 83 CLIFF-STREET. 1841. Entered, according ta Art of Csingresn, in the year 1888, by ~ Ouiniks Antuon, in the Clerk’s Office of the Southern District of New-York. TRANSFER FROM LENOX TO THE REV. WILBUR FISK, DD, PRESIDENT OF THE WESLEYAN UNIVERSITY, oe? Pavergs e’ ASA TRIBGTE “OF PINVERE RESPECT 7a oes bd o ad TO ONE, IN WHOM HUMAN LEARNING IS 80 ADMIRABLY BLENDED WITH THAT BETTER AND PURER KNOWLEDGE, WITHOUT WHICH IT I8 COMPARATIVELY VALUELESS — we . “ . EE, RP er - PREFACE. Tue author’s object, in preparing the present work, was to furnish the student with such a view of the leading fea- tures in the Grammar of the Greek Language as might prove useful to him, not only at the commencement of his career, but also during its whole continuance. Nothing has there- ° fore been omitted, the want of which might in any degree retard his progress ; and yet, at the same time, the work has been brought within such limits as will render it easy of reference and not deter from perusal. The best and latest authorities have been carefully consulted, and every effort has been made to exhibit a concise outline of all the leading principles of Greek Philology. Under the head of Prosody the author has given merely a brief collection of rules, as the larger work on this subject, now in the press, and which will appear in a few weeks, will be found to contain all that is requisite in this department of instruction. To that same work the author has been compelled to transfer the remarks on the analogies of the Indo-Germanic tongues, which were originally intended to form part of the present volume. It was found, as the Grammar advanced towards iis completion, that the addition of these analogies would A 2 vi PREFACE. make it too large in size; and although a work like the present is certainly the true one fer such a discussion, yet © it is hoped that the remarks in question will not be out of place even at the end of a treatise on Greek Prosody. ‘The present work, it will be perceived then, lays but few claims to originality either of design or execution. The object of the editor has been to present, in a small compass, all that his own experience as an instructor has shown him to be really useful in Greek elementary studies. His principal guide has been the excellent grammar of Matthie, of which the present volume may be in some re- spects considered as an abstract; and valuable materials have been at the same time obtained from the labours of * Buttmann, Rost, and other distinguished philologists. As regards the formation of the Greek verb, he has preferred the old system to the more philosophical and elaborate one of Thiersch, from its being better adapted to the ca- pacities of younger students. Thiersch’s system will do very well after an aequaintance with the formation of the Sanscrit verb, but its success otherwise, in this country at least, is extremely problematical. In preparing the present edition for the press, great pains have been taken to ensure accuracy, and in several in- stances changes have been made where the language ap- peared either obscure or wanting in precision. One or two inadvertences of expression, moreover, of no great poment in themselves, have also been rectified, and the sf@tgork is now presented to the young student in the full as- gurance that he will find in it both a useful and an accu- rate manual. PREFACE. Vil The compiler of the present volume owes it to himself. to state, that he intends, at no very distant day, to publish a Grammar of the Greek Language which will lay more claim to the character of an original work, and will be elu- cidated throughout by references te the Indo-Germanic tongues. Such a work, of course, will be intended for more advanced students. In the mean time, he hopes that the plain and unpresuming volume which he now puts forth will not be regarded as the “ultima Thule” of his own researches in Greek philology. : Columbia College, June, 1839. oo INDEX. PAGE . 7, 275|Eluaz, “TI clothe ee is 36! Elvi, “Iam” . 92 | "Hwaz, “TJ sit” . 48/Enclitics . —, Syntax of Voice . . .« « « 7B ww ; Ve. dae fe: - 194 Yialect . . . « «(282 tic Verse - 270 phe. . . 10 ey tats oe 19 Syntax of . 229 ialect . 7 6 « 283 its eae - « 101 WB eo 6 6 6 ow 6 i. Sap we, 18 ‘of Letters . 13 gon. . . «6 » 67 ition, Prosody of 255 tions . .. . 202 mts... - I3 ed Verbs . 139 tion. . “eas 9 a ee 37 Syntax of . 241 ions 20 tS 6 ws ew le 138 mete Ye 281 @ 7, 274 ngs . 3 tialect . eis 282 Feet . . Onpl, “y say” ‘ First Aorist Active —— —— Passive . — — Middle First Future Active . Passive . Middle . Formation of the Tenses Genders. . Genitive, Syntax of . Iambic Verse . "Int, * I send” Imperfect Active . Passive . ———— Active in ue Passive in ue . Infinitive, Syntax of . Ionic Dialect Irregular Nouns — Adjectives . Verbs Verbs in ps Ketyat, * I lie” Viil INDEX. PAGE Letters . . 2°. 2 ©. 1|/Prepositions .... . Pronouns . . . + « « Metres . . .. . . « 268/Prosody. . . 2... Middle Voice . . . . . 124 Relative, Syntax of . . . Nadded. . ..... «I121 Nominative and Verb. . . 231/Second Aorist Active . . Noun. . ...... 20 Passive . . Numbers ...... 18 —— Middle .. Numerals . . .... 7% Active in ps. Participle, Syntax of . . . 247|Second Future Active Parts of Speech . . . . 17 ——- Passive . . Passive Voice. . . . . 965 Middle . . ——, Syntax of . 245] Substantive and Adjective . Patronymics .... . 47|Syntax . . . 2. 2. « « Perfect Active. . . . . 109. Passive . . . . 115/Verbs . . . 1. 2 6 « ——— Middle .. .118,127 N®. 2. . 2 © e Pluperfect Active. . . . 110/-——ingws. . . 2. = Passive . . . 116/Vowels . . . 2. i. « Middle. . . . 118 Middle in pe . ® GREEK GRAMMAR. I. THE ALPHABET.! ‘The Greek alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, Ramely : A, a, 7 Alpha, a. B, B, 6, Bira, Beta, b. yf Tdypa, Gamma, g. A, d, AéAra, Delta, d. KE, &, “EypidAov, Epsilon,*® 6. Z, 6, Zijra, Zeta, Ze _H, 9, "Hra, Eta, é. ~ 0, 3, 8, O7Ta, Theta, th. I; 2, "Iara, Iota, i K, x, Karna, Kappa, k. A, A, Adu6da, Lambda, l. M, pf, Mi, Mu, N, », Nd, Nu, n. ie mb, Xi, x: O,0, “» ’Outkpoy, Omicron? 06. Ii, 7, Tlz, Pi, p- >, "PO, Rho, r. =, 6, (when final, 5) Xéypya, Sigma, 8. oe Tav, Tau, t. Y, v, "YyptAdéy, Upsilon,’ — u. %, 9, Pi, Phi, ph. X, %; Xz, Chi, ch. ¥, w, Ti, Psi, ps. Q, a, *OQuéya, Oméga, }. 1. Consult Excursus 1, at the end of this volume. 2. Smooth, or unaspirated €; so called to distinguish it from H, which was anciently one f the marks of the rough breathing, or aspirate. 3. Small 0, to distinguish it from omega (), or great (i. e., long) o. 4. The German scholars have introduced the practice of using ¢ at the end of syllables likewise, when they make an entire word with which another is compounded; as, dvcuernc, eicpépw, mpoceizov. But this practice, which has not even the authority of MSS. in its favour, cannot be systematically introduced without inconvenience to orthography ; and it is not agreeable to the genius of the ancients, who were not accustomed to separate, by the understanding, the different parts of discourse. 5. Smooth v, to distinguish it from the aspirated v (‘Y), which was one of the ancient signs of the digamma, and also passed into the Latia V, as, Vin1, A1vom. A 2 ) PRONUNCIATION. II. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTERS.! A, when long, is sounded like the English a in far when short, like the a in fat. I’, before a vowel, like the hard English g; but before another y, and also before a x, &, y, is-sounded like ng in sing. ‘Thus, dyyedoc, pronounce ang-élos; dyKx@v, ang-kon, &c.? E, like the short English e in met. Z, like a soft d passing gently into the sound of z. Thus, ¢dw, pronounce d-zao ; pedicw, melid-zo, &c. H, like the English a in cane.* @, like the English ¢h in chink. I, when long, like the English.e in me; when short, like the 2 in pin. Y, like the French u in une, or the German ii. X, always guttural, like the German ch in buch. «. Q, like the o.in throne. PRONUNCIATION OF THE DIPHTHONGS.4 Az, like the English adverb aye. Av, like the syllable ow in now. Ez, like the English word eye. 1. The pronunciation here given is that which has been adopted at the institution from which the present work emanates. It is by no means offered as accurate in every respect, but merely as giving, in some cases, an approximation to the ancient sound, and, in others, the result of mod- ern, though erroneous, usage. A separate work on this much-contested point will appear at no very distant day. 2. The true sound of the y before a vowel would appear to have re- sembled that of the soft g in the German liegen. 3. The 7 appears to have had, originally, a middl@ sound between a and e, and the grounds on which this opinion rests are as follows: 1. The contraction of ae and ea into 7; as, xpderat, ypjrat, Gade, CHe, reivea, Teiyn, GAnGéa, GAnbj. 2. The augment 7, y, and 7, from a, az, and av; as, 7kovov, Gveca, and 7ida. 3. The Doric and olic change of 7 into a; as, ¢aua, Dor. for ¢7un 3 miAa, Aol. for riAn. 4. The primitive sound of the diphthongs appears to have been a-c, a-v, e-t, e-v, &c. The pronunciation of av is obtained from the barkin of the dog (at, av) in Aristophanes, Vesp., 903. The primitive sound of oc seems to have resembled the syllables owy in the word snowy, though, of course, with more of a diphthongal sound. ~ DIVISION OF LETTERS. 3 Ev, like the English word yew. Oz, like the syllable oy in boy. Ov, like the 00 in soon, or the ou in ragout. Ye, like the English pronoun we. III. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. Seven of the letters are vowels, namely, a, €, 7, t, 0, Vy ®. The remaining seventeen are consonants. 1. Vowsg ts. 1. The seven vowels are divided into three classes, namely: short, long, and doubtful.. Thus, Short, _, 9, Long, 7, Ws; Doubtful, a, ¢, v. _ 2. The short vowels are those, the pronunciation of which occupies the shortest possible time. 3. The long vowels are those which require in their pronunciation twice as much time as the short. 4, The doubtful are those which can be pronounced both as short and long in different words, being short in some words and long in others." 2. DipHTHones. 1. The vowels are combined in a variety of ways, two and two together, into one sound, and hence are formed the diphthongs. ; 2. Diphthongs are formed by the union of a back-voweF (a, €, 0) with.a front-vowel (¢, v), producing one sound. 1. The student must not suppose, from the epithet “‘ doubtful,”’ as ap- plied to these vowels, that there is, in every case, something wavering and uncertain in their nature. The meaning is simply this :. the short vowel ¢ has its corresponding long vowel 7, and the short vowel o its corresponding leng vowel w ; but in the case of a, ¢, v, there is no sep- arate vowel-sign for the long and short quantities, and, therefore, the length or shortness of the vowel is to be determined, not by the eye, but by the application of some rule, 2. The sounds of a, e, 0, being formed by the organs in the back part . 4 , DIVISION OF LETTERS. 3. Of the diphthongs, six are proper, where both vowels are heard combined into one sound; and six zwmpropér, where the sound of one vowel predominates over that of the other. 4. The proper diphthongs are, therefore, at, av, &, Ev, Ot, ov. The improper are a, 7, @, where the ¢, or second vowel, is subscribed, and also 7v, vi, wv, which last three are not of as common occurrence as @, 9, ©." & 3. ConsoNaNnrTs. 1. Of the seventeen consonants, nine are mutes, that is, Jetters whereof no distinct sound can be produced without the addition of a vowel. 2. These nine are divided into three classes, namely, soft, intermediate, and aspirate. Thus, Three soft, TT, K, T. Three intermediate, B, y, 0. Three aspirate, d, x; 9. 3. These, when read perpendicularly, form the three orders of mutes, each soft consonant having its correspond- ing intermediate and aspirate. ‘Thus, Tr; B, @. K, Ys X- T, 0, @. of the mouth, may be called back-vowels ; and the sounds of ¢ and v, be- - ing ape in the front part of the mouth, may be denominated front- vowels. 1. Originally, the ¢, 7, » were closely allied to az, et, oz, and only so distinguished, that, in the latter, a, e, and o were sounded of the same length with the ¢; while, in the former, the long sound of @, é, and 6 pre- ceded, and the z merely followed as a short echo. This accurate pronun- ciation, however, appears to have been lost at an early period, even among the Greeks themselves, and therefore, at present, we pronounce g, 4, @ in the same way as d, 7, »; and the subscribed or underwritten iota serves as 8 mere grammatical sign for determining the derivation and for distinguishing the forms. Originally, the ¢, even in these improper diph- thongs, was written by the side of the other sound, and in the use of cap- itals this practice still obtains. Thus we write ddyc, but “Acdyc, passing over, in either case, the sound of the «, So, again, $d7, but, with the eapital letter, ’Qcd7, DIVISION OF LETTERS. 5 4. Mutes of the same class must always come together, ' from a principle of euphony. Thus, INTERMEDIATE. SOFT. ASPIRATE. E6domoc. Ena. H06voc. bydooc. OKTO. Ev6o¢. 5. From the organs with which they are pronounced, 7, 8, @ are termed Jabdials or lip-letters ; x, y, y, gutturals ; and T, 0, 0, dentals. 6. Four of the consonants are called liquids, namely, A, #, », p; and they are so denominated because, in pronunci- ation, they easily flow into other sounds. 7. These four liquids, together with the sibilant, or hiss- ing letter ¢, are also called semivowels, because their sound can be pretty distinctly perceived without the accession of a vowel. 8. There are three double consonants, namely, ¢, &, , composed of any letter of each of the three orders of mutes, ‘followed by ¢. Thus, . ™, Bc, o¢, form wp; Ko, YS, XS, form ¢; (r¢), b¢, (O¢), form ¢." 9. These double consonants are universally used (except in Aolic and Doric Greek) instead of their corresponding simple letters. Not, however, where the two simple letters belong to two different parts of the compound, as éx-cevw, not écbw. 1. The combinations t¢ and 6¢ are merely inserted to complete the analogy to the eye; since ¢ is equivalent, in fact, to d¢ merely, and whenever a, 7, or 9 comes before o, it is thrown away ; a8, dvvow for évirow, and weiow for rei8cw. Sometimes, even in the case of dc, the same rejection takes place, as épeiow for épeidow, where ¢ could not oc- cupy the place of the characteristic letter (c) of the future, 2. Yet ’AOjvace is used instead ne ’AOnvacce. p 6 BREATHINGS. IV. BREATHINGS. * 1. Every vowel, or diphthong, which is pronounced with- out a letter preceding it, is necessarily connected with a breathing. . 2. There are two breathings, the soft' and aspirate; and, consequently, every word beginning with a vowel, or diph- thong, must be pronounced with one of these breathings. 3. The signs employed for these breathings are, for the soft (’), as dei, =; and for the aspirate (‘), as unép, juetc.? 4. The soft breathing has no perceptible power ;* the as- pirate is equivalent to the modern h, as vmép, pronounce huper. 5. Y at the beginning of words in the Attic dialect is al- ways to be pronounced with the aspirate; as tdaivOoc, bdAoc, bBpic. 6. In diphthongs the breathings are marked over the second vowel ; as ol, al, ev@vc, aitéc ; because the breath- “ing does not belong to either of the blended vowels separ- ately, but to the whole mingled sound. When, however, an improper diphthong has the iota adscribed, as in the case of capital letters, or, otherwise, subscribed, the mark of the breathing is placed by or over the initial vowel, as "Ardne, gnc. 7. P is the only consonant that receives a breathing, since it cannot be pronounced without an audible expiration, When p stands at the beginning of a word, therefore, this breathing is always the aspirate ; as péw, puté¢, which in Latin is placed after the R, as rhetor, from the Greek pfjrwp. 1. Called also “‘ smooth,” and by its Latin name lenis. 2. Originally the rough breathing alone had a sign, namely, H, and the smooth remained unmarked. Afterward that sign was divided into two halves, and the first half, I, was employed to derbi the aspirate, the second half, 1, the soft breathing. By a subsequent abbreviation of these, two other marks were formed, namely, | and J, which finally changed into (‘) and (’), the signs now in use. 3. It attaches itself to the sound pronounced, as if spontaneously, with- out any exertion of the lungs. DIGAMMA. af 8. But when a p is followed by another p, the first must have the soft breathing, and the latter the aspirate, as d/- Pnxtoc, Eppeov ; for two of these letters could not be pro- nounced in succession each with an aspirate. V. DIGAMMA. . 1. Besides the rough breathing, there was in several di- alects another sound, somewhat similar in nature, formed between the lips, and having the same relation to f, ph, and v, that the aspirate bears to ch, g, and k. 2. It was originally a full and strong consonant, and rep- resented by a letter closely resembling the Roman F. This letter was called digamma, because looking like a double gamma, and originally occupied the sixth place in the Greek alphabet. 3. The term olic digamma was given to it, because it was retained in the alphabet principally by those branches of the Greek race that were of Aolic descent. Its true name, however, was Bav (Vau), the other appellation hav- ing been invented by the grammarians. 4. In the dialects which retained the digamma, its sound was soon softened down, and it then answered, in pronun- ciation, to the English wh. Between two vowels it was still more attenuated, and passed, even with the olians, into v; as avnp, abac, for djp, Hac. 5. In Holic the digamma served also for the rough breathing, which had no place in that dialect.' VI. ACCENTS.3 * 1. There are three accents in Greek; the acute, grave, and circumflex. . 2. The acute is denoted by the sign (’), as @¢Aak. The 1. For some further remarks respecting the digamma, consult Excur- sus B, at the end of this volume. 2. For a more enlarged view of accents, consult Excursus C. 8 ACCENTS. grave is never marked, but lends its sign to the softened acute. The circumflex is indicated by (~), a8 K7jTrog. 3. In every word there can be but one predominant tone, to which all the rest are subordinate. This is the sharp or acute accent, the fundamental tone of discourse being the grave. 4, The grave accent, therefore, does not require any mark ; since, if the syllable which receives the strengthened accent be ascertained, we know that all the rest must have the weaker or fundamental one. Consequently, it would be superfluous to write Oédd@pdc, since Geddwooc is suffi- clent. 5. When a word which, by itself, has the acute accent on the last syllable, stands in connexion before other words, the acute tone is softened down, and passes more or less into the grave. ‘This depressed accent is called the soft- ened acute, and is indicated by the mark of the grave, the strictly grave syllables having, as we have just remarked, no use for this sign, and lending it, therefore, to the soft- ened acute. Thus, épy7 dé moAAd dpav dvayKdcet KaKd. 6. The acute accent is placed on one of the last three syllables of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. 7. All words which have no accent on the last syllable are called Barytones, because a syllable neither marked by an acute nor circumflex accent has, of course, the grave tone (Gapdv révor). 8. All words which have the acute on the last syllable are called Oxytones (’Oivtéva, from 6fb¢ and révoc).' 1. The ancients observed, in pronunciation, both quantity and accent. This, however, is extremely difficult of accomplishment at the present day, and it is better for the learner, therefore, to let the quantity predom- inate, as being for us the more important of the two. Still, however, the student should accustom himself to distinguish every accented vowel from an unaccented one. Thus, for example, we can accent the first syllable in Gy@pw7oc, and yet keep the second long; as in the English grandfather, alms-basket. Care must -be taken, at the same time, not to prolong the accented short vowels ; as, for example, not to pronounce Sep like grep. MARKS OF READING. 9 VII. MARKS OF READING. 1. For a period and comma the same signs are employed in Greek as in English. 2. The colon and semicolon have one and the same mark, namely, a dot or point above the line ; as, €rudAwoé pe’ kal TupAdce elt. ' 3. A sign of interrogation has this form (;), as, tf tovTo; It is the same in appearance as our English semicolon, and not unlike our mark of interrogation inverted. _ 4. No sign of exclamation occurs in the older editions, yet, after interjections, and terms indicative of feeling, it is well to put the one in use among us; as, ® por, THY Trapby- Tay Kakwv! dev! dev ! 5. Diastéle, or hypodiastole, has the same sign as the comma, and is used in certain small compound words, to distinguish them from others ; as, 6,r¢ (“‘ whatever,” formed from dortc) for distinction sake from 8rz (“that”); and 8,re (“‘ which also”) for distinction sake from 5re (“ when”). 6. In place, however, of the diastole and hypodiastole, many of the more recent editions have merely the syllables of such words separate, and without the inserted mark ; as, 6 re and 6 re, instead of 6,72 and 6,re. This method is at- tended with less interruption than the other, and is, at the same time, equally perspicuous. 7. A dierésis, or sign of separation, is put when two vow- els that follow in succession are not to be read as a diph- thong, but separately. It is indicated by two dots placed horizontally over the second one of the two vowels ; and, if the accent fall on that same vowel, the accentual mark is placed between the two dots. Thus, didj¢ (to be pro- nounced d-td7¢), mpavc¢ (to be pronounced mpa-vc). VIII. CONTRACTIONS. i 1. Contractions are of two kinds, proper and improper, called, otherwise, synerésis and crasis. 10 CONTRACTIONS. 2. A proper contraction, or syneresis, is when two sin- gle vowels, or open sounds, coalesce without change into one diphthong ; as, 776% contracted into jyol ; telyet con- tracted into Teiyet. 3. An improper contraction, or crasis, is when two single vowels coalesce, but are mixed together to such a degree that a vowel or diphthong of a different sound is substitu- ted ; as, relyea contracted into relyn; 6 éud¢ contracted into ovpdc. 4. Syllables contracted by crasis are long, and have com- monly a mark (’) placed over them, indicative of its having taken place. Thus, rdya0d for ta dyad; tabtd for Ta abrd. 5. If, in the process of contraction, a mute is brought be- fore an aspirated vowel, the mute is also aspirated; as, Yoidarog for tov tdatog ; Yoludreov for 7d iudtiov. 6. The subscript iota ought never to appear in contrac- tions by crasis, unless it be found, previous to contraction, in the first syllable of the second word. Thus, xara for nat elra; and éyada for éyo olda. But Kare for kat ért, not Kam; and xdv for Kai dy, not Kav.’ IX. APOSTROPHE OR ELISION. 1. By apostrophe is meant the cutting off of a short vowel gt the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel; and, when this takes place, it is indicated by the © mark (’) set over the empty space; as, én’ éuov for én éuov. 2. When the following word has the rough breathing, and the elided vowel was preceded by a smooth mute, this - mute becomes aspirated ; as, dd’ ov for dd ov. 3. The vowels elided by apostrophe are a, €, ¢, 0, but not v. Monosyllables, however, in a, t, o (the epic fé ex- 1. Many editions of the ancient writers, and almost all the lexicons, of- fend against this rule. APOSTROPHE. 11 cepted), and the ¢ in the dative singular and plural of the third declension, are not elided. 4. Neither does the z in tz and 6rz suffer elision, except in the Homeric dialect. The reason with regard to Te is, that it might sometimes be confounded with te; while, if the ¢ in 6rc suffered elision, 67’ man be confounded with Sre, and 66’ with 66c. 5. The o in 76 is not elided, and for that very reason is not used by the poets before a vowel. In composition, however, it coalesces with the augment, and with the initial vowel of the following word, and oe and oo are contracted into ov ; as, mpovTuper for mpoérurper ; mpovtrrog for mpdorr- TOC. 6. The poets elided, though seldom, the diphthong az ; and only in the passive endings pas, oat, Tal, oOat; as, BovAec®’ Edn, Epxow’ Exwv. Of the elision of the diphthong ot no example is found in Homer and the epic poets. The Attics elided it only in oly’ for ae before w, but not in proc and oot. 7. Since elision, by the suppression of vowels, evidently hurts, in some degree, distinctness of expression, it is gen- erally avoided in prose, so that even the slenderest sounds sometimes remain open. 8. When the first word ends with a long vowel or diph- thong, and the second begins with a short vowel, this latter is elided by the Attic poets; as, ov ’oriv for mov éortiy ; "Ep *urroAate for ‘Epun éurroAaie. And, in prose writers, @ ’yaGé for © ayaGé. 9. In diphthongs,- also, the first short vowel is cut off after a long one in the preceding word, chiefly after 7; a8, 4 "voébeca for } evoébera; 7) pw for pz) etpw. X. N égeAnvorixov. 1. By v édeAnvorixéy is meant v appended to certain final syllables, and it was so called because, as was erro- 12 FINAL LETTFRS. neously supposed, this v did not belong to the termination, but was appended to the final vowel merely to prevent an hiatus (a word ending with a vowel and the next word be-. ginning with one), and, therefore, drew, as it were, the sec- ond vowel to the first. 2. In truth, however, this y is not, as is generally sup- posed, merely an invention for the sake of euphony, but be- longed to the ancient formation, and was first dropped be- fore a consonant as the language became softer. 3. This v épeAxvorixév is added (to adopt the language of grammarians) to datives plural in oz, and, consequently, in &: and wz; to the third persons of verbs in e or 2; to the numeral elxoor, “twenty,” and to the adverbs rrépvai, rave tdraot, voodt, mpdoGe, ke, vv, when the following word be- gins with a vowel; as, év pnoiv dAlyoc, maowy elev exei- voc, Erupev abtév, eixoowy Ern yeyovac, &c. XI. OTHER FINAL LETTERS. 1. The letter ¢ is sometimes found at the end of words, on the same principle as the » é¢eAnvorixév. Thus, we have ovrw before a consonant, and ovtwe before a vowel. So also in péypic and dypic, except that these two last often stand without ¢ before a vowel. 2. In like manner, the particle ov, “ not,” takes before a ' consonant a final «, and, consequently, before the rough breathing a final y. Thus, ov mdpeotivy, ob Eveotiv, oby UMEOTLY. 3. When, however, this particle stands at the end of a clause, or where there is a pause in the sense, the « falls away; a8, TovTO O’ ov, “ but this not.” Ov: dad’ brav—, “ No: but when—.” 4, The preposition 2, “out of,” has this form only be- fore vowels and before a pause; as, é& éuov, é& brov, ka- wav &&. Before all consonants the ¢ of the double letter & (xc) falls away, and the « remains; as, éx tovrov, éx Oad- doone, ék yic. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 48 XII. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 1. In the concurrence of two or more consonants, those of the same class can alone stand together, as has already been remarked. Hence an aspirated consonant can only be joined to an aspirate, a middle to a middle, a smooth to a smooth. In the formation of Greek words, therefore, we must change rétpi6rae = into TétpiTrrat. éypaprar “ 191 cia 6doc. émypagdny “ énevypdbdny. b “ érbgOny. Tptb6Ojoonar “ tprpOjoomat. édeytae = =—* (DEA eKTAaL. Bébpeytae =“ Bébpexrac. 5xdo0¢ “ bydoas. erAéKOnv = “Ss bre Abn. AeyOjoouas “ AsyOfjoopat. In composition, however, the preposition é« remains un- changed before 7, d, 0, and hence we have éxdi:dévaz, éx- Ocivat, &c. | 2. Three or more consonants cannot stand immediately together: but one of them (usually a o standing between two consonants) must be omitted, or such forms entirely avoided. Thus, Instead of rérvpode we say Tétupébe. mevrAévoOae =“ =rrerrAéx Oat. térugvrae “ rerbdarat, or teruppévor elot. Exceptions. (1.) This rule does not operate in com- pounds, where perspicuity of derivation renders the reten- tion of the third consonant necessary ; as, éxrriw, éxorrév- dw, dvopOaproc. (2.) If the first or last of the three con- sonants is a liquid: (A, p, v, p), whereby the harshness of Siriaas pa is softened ; as, ExxAjoia, reupbelc, oxAnpoc, wa, aloxpodc. 3. ‘Two syllables following one another cannot both be- gin with an aspirate (¢, y, 0); but, in this case, the aspi- rated consonant which stands at the beginning of the first syllable is changed into its ee smooth. Thus, 14 > CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. For dedidAnka we say trediAnka. xexopnka «= REYWPNKA. dEOvnxa =“ TED Ka. Exceptions. (1.) The passive termination in 077, and all its derivative terminations which begin with 9, have no in- fluence upon the preceding aspirate; and thus we write, Opedbny, &ybOnv, YapOjoorvta, SpepO7jvat. In the verbs _ Ybery and rOévaz alone, 3 is changed into t before those terminations ; as, &rvOnv, éréOnv. (2.) So also the adver- bial terminations Yev and 3 ; as, tavTaydbev, KoprvO60. (3.) In most compounds also the rule is neglected ; as, dv- Goddpoc, Epvdairw. 4. If the latter aspirate, which caused the change, dis- appear, the former resumes its proper shape; thus, Yd- gog becomes tddoc, “a grave,” by the previous rule, but the verb is Yarrw, “I bury.” So tpédw makes Vpéeru, in the future; tpéyw, Ypétw ; Tidw, Yirpw ; the presents of these verbs being changed by the previous rule from Spédw, IpéExw, and Yidw. So also the noun Ypéé, “ hair,” makes tpiyoc in the genitive (instead of the old form Opi- xoc) and Jpié: in the dative plural, where the aspirate re- appears. 5. The rough breathing likewise disappears in the first syllable when y stands in the next. ‘Thus, the old and genuine form of €yw was éxyw, but the aspirate was changed into the smooth for euphony, and reappears when the y-is no longer present, as in the future &w. 6. When the rough breathing meets with a smooth, it changes the same into an aspirate, not only in composition, but, as has already been remarked, even in accidental con- currence ; as, Edodoc (from émi and ddéc), deyjpepoc (from déxa and nuépa), ép’ quépav (for ém’ quépav), &c. 7. Aspirates are never doubled ; but, when two come to- gether, the first must be changed into its own smooth; as, Largo, not Lapgow ; Bdxyoc, not Bayyoc ; ’ATOic, not ’AG- Gic ; Mar@atoc, not MadGaioc. : 8. The letter p in the beginning of a word is doubled whenever it is preceded by a vowel in composition or in- flection; as, éppé0nv from péw; appyroc, tepippooc, S&c. After a diphthong, however, the single p remains; as, ev- poos, evpvOu0c. 9. Before p, the labials B,7,$,y are changed into p; CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 15 as, for rétpibar write rétpipar; for rérumpas write ré- Tuppat ; for yéypag¢pat, yéypayyat. Before the same let- ter, « and y are changed into y; as, AéAcypae for AéAcy- par; dédoywar for dédoxpar. And the linguals 0d, 6, rT, ¢ are changed before the same into 0; as, doua for ddua ; Trémrecopat for trétrevOuar; Fvvopat for fvutpar ; whdropa for andicua. 10. Before o, the linguals d, 6, r, ¢ are dropped ; as, for mrédot write mréot; for TAG00w, TAHOw ; for caparot, oo- pact; for dprdfow, dprdow. “ 11. The letter v, before the labials B, p, 7, $, », is changed into p; as, éuGdAdAw (from éy and BéAAw), ovp- tpéoow (from ov and mpdcow), &c. The same letter is changed into y before y, «, x, € (though pronounced as ng) ; as, éyyeAdw (from éy and yeAdw), ovyyaipw (from ovy and xalpw), &. 12. If » comes before A or p, it is changed into A or p; as, for ovvAoyliow, ovvpinrw, write ovAAcyifw, ovppirrw. 13. The letter » is usually thrown away before o or ¢; as, for dafuovot, ovvgvyla, write daluoot, ovgvyia. But the preposition év before o and ¢ remains throughout un- changed ; as, évociw, évféouat. On the other hand, the preposition avy, before o followed by a vowel, changes v into 0; as, ovooitia, ovoceiw, for ovvottia, ovvociu. 14. When the letter v, and rT, 6, or 0 following, are to- gether rejected before o, then the vowel remaining, if short, is changed into a diphthong, namely, e into e, and o into ov ; and, if a doubtful vowel, is lengthened. The long vow- els 7 and w remain unchanged. ‘Thus, tudGevtat becomes Tudeiot. OTTEVOOG) ae oTreioa). AeovrTol ad Aéovot. TUNTOVTOL 6 TUNTOVOL. rupavrat «= “* ss Tinbaot. yiryavrou «= “vk yGot. Oetkyvuvrot - delkvvot. TUNTWVTOL a TUTNTWOL. In some instances this alteration takes place when only 2 - has been rejected ; as, ve becomes elc ; tdAave, TéAGc ; pérAave, pérac. 16 FIGURES AFFECTING SYLLABLES. XIII. FIGURES AFFECTING SYLLABLES. 1. Prosthésis is the addition of one or more letters at the beginning of a word; as, opixpéc for pcxpdc ; éelxooe for slxoot.' 2. Paragoge is the addition of one or more letters at the end of a word ; as, 00a for 7¢; Adyototy for Adyous. 3. Epenthésis is the insertion of one or more letters in the body of a word ; as, wréAepoc for éAeuog ; Sr@éTEepos for émérepoc. 4. Syncdépe is the taking away of one or more letters from the body of a word; as, Tépaoc for répatog ; traTpé¢ for trarépoc. 5. Apherésis is the taking away of one or more letters from the beginning of a word; as, elBw for Ae(Bw ; 7 for $q or Edn. 6. Apocdpe is the taking away of one or more letters from the end of a word; as, dp for rapa; dé for dapa. 7. Metathésts is the transposition of letters and syllables ; as, ErrpaGov for ExapOov, from 7rép6w ; Edpaxov for Edapkoy, from dépxw ; xpadla for xapdia ; draprré¢ for drparréc. 8. Tmésis is the separation of the preposition of a com- pound from the verb by means of some other word interve- ning; as, vrép Tiva Every for vrepéyery Tivd. XIV. DIALECTS.’ 1. The principal dialects of the Greek language are four; the Molic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. 2. The olic retained the most numerous traces of the early Greek, and hence the Latin coincides more with this than with the other dialects. Jt was distinguished from the Doric by trifling differences ; chiefly, however, by the use © 1. Most, if not all, of the examples of prosthesis are, in fact, old forms of the language. So also those of paragoge and epenthesis. 2. For more particular remarks concerning the dialects, consult Ex. cursus D, and the observations at the end of each declension, &c. DIALECTS, — 17 of the digamma before vowels at the beginning and in the middle of words, and before some consonants, as p; whereas the digamma was dropped by the Doric and other dialects. 8. The Doric was hard, rough, and broad, particularly from the frequent use of a for 7 and w; as, & Ad@a for AnOn; tTav Kopay for Tay Kopey ; and from the use of two consonants, where the other Greeks employed the double consonants ; as, peAodetas for pedrcerat, &c., which was also the custom in ASolic. It was rudest among the Spar- tans, the enemies of all change, and was spoken in its great- est purity by the Messenians. 4. The Ionic was the softest of all the dialects, on ac- count of the frequent meeting of vowels, and the rejection of aspirated letters. Thus, they said trovéw for rot@ ; TriT- Teo for Térrrov ; dékowac for déyouas; drraipéw for ddaipo Hence also it is fond of the hiatus, or confluence of vowel sounds, against which the Attic so carefully guards. 5 The Attic was the most polished dialect,-and forms the basis of our ordinary grammars. It avoided the colli- sion of vowel sounds, and was, therefore, fond of contrac- tions. It differed from the Ionic by using the Jong a where the Ionians employed the 7 after a vowel or the letter 6, and by preferring the consonants with an aspirate, which the Ionians rejected. It employed, also, in its later stages, the double fp instead of the old pc, and the double rr instead of the hissing oo. XV. PARTS OF SPEECH. 1. There are eight parts of ‘speech in Greek, namely, Ar- ticle (GpOpov), Noun (6voua), Adjective (émlOerov), Pronoun (4ytwvupla), Verb (pjwa), Adverb (értppjya), Preposition (rpo8éotc), and Conjunction (ovvdeopoc). 2. The Interjection is ranked among adverbs. 8. The Article, Noun, Adjective, and Pronoun are de B2 18 PARTS OF SPEECH. clined by Genders (yévn), Cases (rrwoetc), and Numbers (dpcOyol). 4. There are three Genders; the Masculine (yévoc dp- oevixév), Feminine (SnAvxdy), and Neuter (oidérepov) ; and to mark the gender the article is usually employed in gram- mar; namely, 6 for tlie masculine, 9) for the feminine, and 76 for the neuter. ‘Thus, 6 dvOpwrroc, “ the man ;” 7) yuvh, “the woman ;” TO xpiua, “ the thing.” Some nouns, how- ever, are both masculine and feminine; as, 6, 7), xérivoc, “ the wild olive-tree.” ‘These are said to be of the common gender. 5. There are three numbers, the Singular (dpiOpd¢ éu- xéc), Dual (évixéc), and Plural (mAn@vytixéc). The sin- gular denotes one ; the plural more than one ; the dual, two, or a pair. 6. There are five cases, the Nominative (rrwotg dvouac- TtKh), Genitive (yertkh), Dative (dorexf), Accusative (alti- arikh), and Vocative (KAnruch). 7. The Greek name of the ablative would be dgacpert- kf, but the national grammarians of Greece do not make mention of this case, because in Greek its form is, in every instance, the same with the dative. GENERAL RULES. 1. Nouns of the neuter gender have the nominative, ac- cusative, and vocative alike in all the numbers; and these cases in the plural end always in a. 2. The nominative and vocative plural are always alike. 8. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are alike ; as also the genitive and dative. 4. The dative singular in all three declensions ends in ¢. In the first two, however, the ¢ is subscribed. 5. The genitive plural ends always in wy. THE ARTICLE. 19 XVI. THE ARTICLE. 1. The article is a word prefixed to a noun, and serving to ascertain or define it. Its declension is as follows : Singular. Masc. Fem. Neuter. Nom. 6 q v6 the. Gen. TOU THO TOU- of the. Dat. TO TH TO to the. Accus. rév THY TO . the. Dual. hee! i TO Ta TO the two. Ne TOLY TaLy ToL of — the Plural. Nom. ol al Td the. Gen. TOV TOV TOY of the. Dat. TOC Talc ToC to the. Accus. Tove Tae Ta the. REMARKS ON THE ARTICLE. 1. The article was originally a demonstrative pronoun; but, in the later Ionic and Attic dialects, it became merely a means of defining nouns.’ 1. In the older grammars two articles are given; the prepositive, 4, %, 76, and the postpositive, 5c, #, 5, which we call, at the present day, the relative pronoun. In a sentence like the following, ‘This is ¢ man who will deliver us” (Odroc toriv 6 dvnp d¢ odcet nude), the two words “the” and “who” (6 and 6c) refer so intimately to each other, and lock, as it were, into one another so much like joints, connecting in this way the two clauses as members or limbs of one sentence, that the Greeks termed them p6pa, articuli, or joints. The first of these, how- ever, namely, 6, 7, 70, stands very commonly with its simple clause alone, and is therefore, strictly speaking, in such instances no longer an article or joint. But this arises from the circumstance, that, in very many instances of this kind, the second clause is not expressed in words, put is left to be mentally supplied; such as, “‘who is spoken of,” or 20 - NOUNS. ‘ 2. There is no form of the article for the vocative, for @ is an interjection. 3. If the particles ve and de are annexed to the article, it has the signification of the pronoun “this,” but the de- clension remains the same. Thus, de, 7jde, téde, genitive Tovde, THODE, TOVdE, &c. 4. In the early Greek the article was 7é6¢, 77, 76, and hence arise the plural tof, raf in Doric and Ionic, and the r in the neuter and the oblique cases. XVII. NOUNS. 1. The Declensions (xAioetc) of nouns are three, corre- sponding to the first three declensions in Latin. 2. The First Declension has four terminations: two fem- tnine, a and 7; and two masculine, ac and ne. 3. The Second Declension has two terminations, o¢ and ov. Nouns in o¢ are generally masculine, sometimes femi- nine ; nouns in ov are always neuter. 4. The Third Declension ends in a, t, v, neuter; w fem- inine; and v, &, p, o, », of all genders; and increases in the genitive. XVIII. FIRST DECLENSION. Terminations. ; i feminine. | ie masculine, 1. Nouns in pa and a pure, that is, a preceded by a vowel, together with some proper names, as Afjda, ’Av- dpouéda, DiAophAa, Acoriua, and also the substantive dAa- Ad, “a war-cry,” have the genitive in ac, and retain their a through all the cases of the singular. «¢ who is here concerned,”’ or “‘ whom you know,” &c. Hence it became, by degrees, a usage of the language to annex the prepositive article d, 4, 76 by itself to every object which is to be represented as definite, ei by means of the language itself or from the circumstances. In whole theory, however, the two articles are adjective pronouns. (Buéé- mane’s larger Grammar, p.121, Robinson's transl.) = FIRST DECLENSION. 21 2. All the contracted nouns of this declension likewise retain the a in the genitive and other cases of the singular ; as, pvd, pv-ac, &c.; ’AOnva, ’AOnv-dc, &c. 3. All other nouns in a have the genitive in 7¢, and da- tive in y; but in the accusative and vocative they resume their a. 4. Nouns in 7 retain the 7 throughout the singular num- ber, making the accusative in 7v, and the vocative in 7. EXAMPLES. % 7pépa, * the day.” Singular, Dual. Plural. N. 7 mép-t, N. 7d syép-a, N.al #pép-at, ~- G. rig tyep-ag, G. ratv nuép-av, G. tov 7pEp-Cv, D. 79 iutp-¢, D. ratv qyép-awv, D. rai juép-ats A. tTyv tee A. ra fe A. ra¢ vee V qép-a. Vv. nuép- a. V. r) : 4) copia, wisdom.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N.% cogi-a, - N. ra codi-a, N. al aogi-at, G. Tij¢ cogi-as, G. raiv cogi-aty, G. Tév cogi-ov, D. rg codgi-g, D. rai cogi-aty, D. rai¢ cogi-aic, A oogi-ay, A. 7d codgi-a, A. Ta¢ codgi-ac, Vv cogi-a. V. cogi-a. V. cogi-at. 4 Od&a, “‘ the opinion.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N.9% 66&-a, N. ra ddé-a, N. ai 66&-at, G. rig 66&-@e, G. raiv d6é-acv, G. rédv dog-dy, D. rg 668-9, D. raiv 66é-aty, D. rai¢ d6é-atc, hd Sia A. ti 66§-av, A. ta 66é-a, A..ta¢ 66&-ac, V. 66€-a. VV. «° «dé6&a. V. 06€-at. 7 Kepaah, “‘ the head.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N.% e¢cA-%, N. rd xegad-d, N. af xegad-ai, G. rie xepad-fe, G. raly xepad-aiv, G. rév xegad-éyv, D. rh Kxegad-4, D. taiv xepad-aiv, D. raic xepad-aic, A. ty ; A. ta kegad-d, A. Tag Kegad-tc,~ V. Vv. kepad-d. V. kegaa-al. 22 Like nyuépa, ipa, a door, Edpa, a seat, Dercuine ayopd, a market-place, Gyxvpa, an anchor, yégtpa, a bridge. Like ddéa, yAaooa, a tongue, dixpa, thirst, meiva, hunger, VdAacoa, a sea, pila, a root, GutAdAa, a contest. FIRST DECLENSION. Like co¢ia, olxia, a house, oxia, a shadow, grAia, friendship, aitia, a cause, éApera, truth. Like xegaay, Kun, hair, Pury, a voice, on, @ song, vegédn, a cloud, ceAqvn, the moon, Tih, honour. 5. Nouns in ac make the genitive in ov, and the dative in g, and the remaining cases like those of 7juépa. 6. Nouns in 7¢ make the genitive in ov, the accusative in 7”, and the vocative in 7, and the rest like 7juépa. ExamPp.Les. 6 veavlac, “ the youth.” Singular. N.6 veavi-ac, G. rod veavi-ov, - D. r6 veavi-g, A. Tov veari-av, Dual. N. To veavi-a, G. roiv veavi-acy, D. roty veavi-aty, A.T® veavi-a, Plural. N. of veavi-at, G. rév veavi-dv, ~ D. rotc veavi-aig, A. Tove veavi-ac, V. veavi-a. V. veavi-a. V. veavi-at. 6 Tedwyne, “ the tax-gatherer.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N.6 reddv-ne, N. 7® reddv-a, N. of . reAdv-at, G. rod treAdv-ov, G. totyv teAdy-asy, is TOV Tedwy-y, D. te redev-y, D. roiv redov-aty, . Toig Tehdy-acte, A. Tov TeAav-ny, A.T@ Teddr-a, re TOG TeAGr-ag, V. TEAov-n. V. TEedty-a. V. TeAGy-al. DEc.inE Like veaviag, Like reAdvne, poviac, a@ solitary, Tapia, a steward, KoxAiac, a snail, Alveiac, Eneas, Iivayépac, Pythagoras, , Anaxagoras. ’Avatayépac Gxivdnac, a short sword, xetpor: ¢, @ workman, ¢, @ goat-sucker, EAAnvodinne, ajudge at the genes, ’Arpetdne, Atrides, "Ayxionc, Anchises. FIRST DECLENSION. 23 7. Nouns in t7¢, compounds in mc; as, Kvvetrne, “ an impudent person ;” names indicative of nations; as, épone, “@ Persian,” XKvOne, “ a Scythian ;” together with deriv- atives from peTp@, TWA@, and tpl6w, as, yewpétpne, “a ge- ometer,” uvpon@dAnc, “a vender of perfumes,” tracdotpib6ne, “‘ a teacher of gymnastics,” make the vocative singular in d, © notin7. Thus, cvvarne, voc. kuvard ; Wéponc, voc. Mép- oa. But Ilépoyjc, a man’s name (Perses), makes 7. 8. Nouns in or7¢ have 7 or @ in the vocative ; as, Ayorie, “puaZz D. roiv xep-drow, . . . Kep-Gowv, . . kep-@ A. TO kép-are,. . . . Kép-ae, . . . Kép-a. V. kép-ate,. . . . Kép-ae, . . . Kkép-a. Plural. N. 71a «ép-atra, . . . Kép-aa,. . . kép-a. G. tév kép-atwv, . . . Kep-dwr, . . KEep-Ov. D. roi¢ xép-act. Yo eee eee ee 10, Some words in 7p, genitive -epoc, throw away the e before p in the genitive and dative, and so exhibit a double form. After the letter v, when it is brought into collision with p in such forms, a d is added in order to soften the sound. The noun vrar#p is an instance of the first mode of declining, the noun dvfjp of the second. Thus: 6 marnp, “ the father.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N. 6 sar-7p, N.7t® sat-épe, N.of sar-épec, G. rot mwart-époc, -péc, | G. roiv rar-époty, G. tév wat-épur, -par, D. r6 mar-épt, -pi, | D. rotv rat-épory, D. roi¢ rart-pdet, A. Tou mar-épa, A.T® mart-épe, A. Tove rat-épac, WUT-Ep. V. mwat-épe. V. mwar-épec. 1. In the same way are declined yyrnp, “a mother,” and yaor7p, “a stomach,” except that yaor7p makes in the dative plural yaor7pot, which appears to have been also the old form of zarjp and parnp. It must be remembered, moreover, that aryp, untyp, and yaor7p make the ac- cusative singular without contraction. This is done in the case of 7- Tnp, to prevent its being confounded with yu7Tpa, -ac, “a womd ;” in the case of zar7p, to prevent its being confounded with mdrpa, -ac, “a pa- ternal land ;” and in yaor7p, to prevent similar confusion with ydorpa, eas, “‘ the bottom of «a vessel.” ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 43 6 dvip, “the man.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N.6 év-fp N. to dveépe, - N. of dv=éper, -dper, G. rot év-époc, -dpd¢, |G. roiv dveépory, hoe G. rév dreé ; -épan, D. 76 dv-épt, -dpi, |D. rotv dv-éporv, -dpoiv,|D. roic¢ dv-dpéor, A. tov hor bi -dpa, |A. To A i -dpe, NA. Tovc Gv-épac, -dpac, V. Gy-ep. Vv. Gv-épe, -dpe. IV. Gy-épec, -dper. 11. Some nouns are contracted by either dropping a vowel, or blending two vowels into one, and this contrac- tion takes place in every case. Thus: Td Eap, contr. Fp, 6 Keveoy, contr. KEevor, “ the spring.” “ the belly.” Singular. Singular. N. 7d Eap, Hp, N.6 xevedy, xevdr, G. rod bap-o¢, Hpos, G. rod xeve-Gvog, Kev-Gvoe, D. 76 &ap-t, Apt, &c. D. TO Keve-Gut, xev-dvt, &c. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 1. That is called anomalous which is inconsistent with - the- prescribed laws of formation; as, for example, when xaptc, though formed from a root vapid, makes ydptroc in the genitive, not ydpzdoc. 2. The greater part of the actual deviations from regular declension consist in the interchange of forms. In the more ancient language, it often happened that a word had two or more terminations and modes of inflection, with only one and the same signification. Only one of these forms was, for the most part, retained as the language became im- proved. ‘The other was merely employed, now and then, when a more sonorous term was needed, especially in po- etry. Thus, Anujtnp, more seldom, Ajuntpa, “ Ceres ;” ddxpvoy, older form ddxpv, -voc, “ a tear.” | 3. Sometimes the two forms remained more or less in common. use by the side of each other ; as, vldc, “a son,” genitive viov ; and also vigoc, from a nominative of the third declension in eve. , 4. Sometimes both forms originate from the same nom- inative, in which case the word is called a Heteroclite. Thus, Oldémove, genitive Oldérrodoc, and Oldérov. 5. When, however, one of the forms can be traced to an AB 44 ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. obsolete or unusual nominative, it is called Metaplasm ; as, dévdpov, gen. -ov; dative plural dévdporc, and also dévdpeo- cv, from a nominative 7d dévdpoc. 6. Most of the common and poetical anomalies that oc- cur in declension consistof heteroclites and metaplasms. 7. To the heteroclites belong certain words that are in- flected after both the first and third declensions. Some of ‘these carry this double mode of inflexion throughout ; as, poxnc, “a mushroom,” genitive pvKov and pinnroc, &c. This is particularly the case with proper names in 7¢ ; as, Adpne, genitive Adpov and Adpytoc. Others have it only in part; as, Swxpdrnc, accusative Lwxpdtn and Lwxpdrny. 8. Nouns in we sometimes make the genitive in w and woc. Thus, Mivwe, gen. Mivw and Mivwoc; rrdaTtpwe, “a paternal uncle,” gen. madtpw and TdaTpwoc. @ Nouns in we, genitive wroc¢, sometimes drop the 7; as, [dpwc, “ sweat,” which has not only /dpdre and ldpadra in the dative and accusative, but also r@ /dp@ and rév ldpa, ‘the latter being Attic forms. 10. Nouns in we and wy have sometimes the anomaly still more apparent, since it shows itself even in the nom- inative. Thus, 6 rawc, gen. Tae, “ the peacock,” and 6 Ta- @v, genitive tawvoc. So, also, 7) GdAwe, gen. dAw, “ the threshing-floor,” and dAwe, gen. dAwoc. 11. The declension of vave, a ship, is as follows: 7 vave, “the ship.” Attic. Epic and Ionic. Dorie. - Sing. N. vac, Sing. N. vate, Sing. N. vac, G. yeds, G. vnd¢ and vede, G. vaée, D. vat, D. vii, D. vat, A. vaty, A. via and véa, A. vaty and vay, V. vate. V. vaie. V. vac. Dual. N. vie, Dual. N. vije, Dual. N. vée, G. veoiv, G. veoiv, G. vaoiv, D veoiv, D. veoiv, D. vaoiv, A vie, A. vije, A. vae, V.. viz. V. vije. V. vde. Pl. N. vijec, Pl. N.viec and véec, | Pl. N.vdec, * G. vedr, . VEOY, G. vadv, D. vavaoi D. vnvai and véecat, D. vavoi, A. vaic, A. vijag and véag, A. vac, V.. vies. V. vijec. V. vGee. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 45 12. The noun Gove, “ an ox,” makes Bod¢ in the geni- tive, Govy in the accusative, and in the plural, nom. Béec, contracted Bovc, dative Bovel, accusative Bdac, contr. Bove. 13 The declension of Zeve is also peculiar. ‘Thus, N. Zetec, G. Znvdc¢ and Adc, D. Zvi and Aci, A. Ziva and Aia, V. Zed. . 14, Under the head of anomalies in declension may be ranked the very peculiar paragogic ending in gy or qu. This is of very common occurrence in epic poetry, and is used instead of the ordinary dative or genitive singular. The rules that control it are as follows: 1. In the first de- clension, nouns in 7 throw away the o of the genitive; as from evvij¢ is formed etv7igey. The dative, however, ap- pends guy or gu at once ; as, evry, ebvidiv. 2. If the noun end in o¢ or ov, the o alone remains before guy or ¢2, while in those in o¢, which make the genitive in eo¢, contr. ove, the form e¢ (or eve), the Ionic contraction from eo¢ enters. Thus we have from otpatov the form otparégiyv; from Epé6oc, gen. épébeoc, contr. -ovc, the form épé6evodiy ; from “orh0oc, gen. orhOcoc, contr. ornBove, the form orf#Veodguy. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 1. Defective nouns are such as cannot, from their very nature, occur in more than one number. Thus, ol érn- olat, “the etesian winds ;” ra Atoviata, “the festival of Bacchus.” 2. Some again are only employed in the nominative and accusative ; as, the neuters, évap, “a dream ;” trap, “a vision ;” déuac, “ a body.” 7 3. Others are only used in the nominative ; as, dpedoc, “‘ advantage ;” 700c, “ benefit.” Or in the vocative; as, @ ray, “O thou.” 4. Many from having been nouns have become adverbs in consequence of their being employed in only one partic- ular case; as, émikAny, “ by name ” 46 DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 1. Under this are ranked most of the cardinal numbers , as, Tevre, “ five ;” é&, “six i” emra, “ seven,” &c. 2. The names of the letters ; as, dAda, Bijta, &c. 3. The neuter participle 6 ypewy, from the impersonal xen. 4. The noun Yéuc, when it occurs in the formula Sépec éori. DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 1. The AZolians said 7éAvrov for troAvrrovy, the accusa- tive of toAbrrove. They also employed yéAov for yéAwra, the accusative of yéAwe, and fjpwr for 7pwe. 2, The Aolians said Larg@wc, Anrwe, in the nominative, instead of Targa, Anta. . 3. The /Eolians frequently employ the termination ev¢ instead of n¢; as, “Apeve for “Apnc¢, and form the oblique cases as follows: gen. “Apevoc ; dat. “Apevs ; acc. “Apeva. The nominative in ev¢ sometimes occurs also in Doric ; as, Eipndeve, Theocrit. 5, 134. 4. ‘The olians and Dorians use in the genitive singular the termination eve instead of eo¢ ; as, Ydubeve for Ydpbeoc. . So, also, eve for ewe ; as, "AytAdeve for "AyLAAEwS. 5. The Holians say Zwxpdrov in the genitive instead of Lwxpdtove ; and in the vocative Swxpare. Hence Pericle in Cicero, Off. 1. 40. 8. 6. The Dorians said, in the genitive plural, alyday for al- yov ; Onpay for Onpe@y ; and, in the nominative, Ilooeday for Ilocedav. 7. The Dorians said zroruav for trorujy, and so through- out. So, also, dpaci for dpeci, the dative plural of ppv. 8. The Dorians used xpje¢ for xpéac ; and pyri for dpé- att, the dative of dpéap. 9. In such forms as Bove, gen. Bodc, the Dorians change ov in all the cases into w; as, nominative Boc, Theocrit. 8. 77.; acc. pl. tag Bac ; dative pl. Bwotr, &c. 10. The ieee often employ the termination y¢ in the nominative for evc. Thus they say, ”O for ’Opdetc ; DiAne for dideve, &c. pona tere eo 11. The Doric vocative of nouns in eve is formed in 7, as, Tvdn. PATRONYMIC NoUNs. * ‘ 47 12. In the Ionic dialect, the genitive plural ends in éwyv ; as, dvdpé@y, yerpéwr, unvéwy. . 13. Nouns in éc¢, gen. cdo, lose in Ionic the d, and those in ac, gen. atoc, the +. Thus, ’Ooipioc for ’Oolpidoc ; Géri for Oéridt ; ynpaog for ynparoc ; KEpaoc for Képartoc. 14. The Ionians do not contract the cases of contracti- ble nouns ; as, évidpvec, not évidpyc. So, also, they say éddpvac, Erreoc, ‘HpaxdAéne, &c. 15. The Ionians decline nouns in Eve with 7 not con- tractible ; as, BaotAjoc, toxjwy, &c. "16. Nouns in t¢ are declined by the Ionians with z con- tractible ; as, 76Acc, gen. méALo¢g ; Sic, gen. dptoc. 17. The Ionians are fond of the termination eoz in the dative plural; as, yeipeot, xvveot, dvdxteat, &c. XXI. PATRONYMIC NOUNS. _ . ! 1. Patronymics are nouns which designate a son or a daughter. They are derived from the proper namé of the father, sometimes also from that of the mother. 2. The Mascunine Patronymics are of two classes. The first class end in either idn¢, ddnc, or eddnc, and form the genitive in ov. The second end in cwy, and make the genitive in wvoc, rarely ovoc. 3. Patronymics in 1d7¢ and cwy are formed from nouns in o¢ of the second declension. Thus, from Kpévoc, “ Sat- urn,” come the patronymics Kpovidn¢ and Kpoviwy, both meaning “ the son of Saturn,” i. e.,Jupiter. So from Ké- dpog we have Kodpidyc; from Tdvradoc, Tartadidne ; from Alaxdée, Alaxidne. 4. Patronymics in zadn¢ are formed from nouns in uoc; as, from “HAog comes ‘HArddne ; from ’AoKAfmtoc, ’Ao- KAnniddne ; from Aagprioc, Aaspriddne. 5. Patronymics in édn¢ come from nouns in 7¢ and ac of the first declension. Thus, from ‘Immérn¢ comes ‘Irrord- Once; from ’AAedac, ’AAevddne. 6. In nouns of the third declension the genitive serves as the basis of derivation. If the penult of the genitive be short, the patronymic from o¢ is formed in (dn¢; as, from 48 | ADJECTIVES. Ayapéuvwy, gen. -ovoc, comes ’Ayapenvovidnc ; from Oéo- TWP, gen. -opoc, Beoropidne 5 from Ayre, gen. -oo¢, Anrol- Onc, &c. But if the penult of the genitive be long, the patronymic ends in sédy¢ ; as, from TeAauwy, gen. -wvoc, comes TeAapwriddne ; from ’Aupitpiwy, gen. -wvoc, ’Ap- getpvwrvidene. 7. Nouns in eve, which in Ionic have the genitive in 7oc, give rise to the patrymonic form 7idénc. . Thus, from II7- Aeic, gen. -jocs, comes IInAniddnc; from Iepoetc, gen. -noc, Ileponiddne. But since these have also the termina tion ewe in the genitive, which continued to be the prevail- ing one in the Attic and common dialects, hence arose, from Ilepoetc, gen. Ilepoéwe, the patronymic form Ilepoetdye ; from ’Atpeve, gen. ’Atpéwe, the form ’Atpetdne. 8. The Fremate Patronymics have four terminations, namely, either cdc, f¢, évn, or wavy. Thus, from Bpzoeic comes Bptonic ; from *“ArAac, ’AtAavtic; from “Adpnotos, ’"Adpnotivn ; from ’Axpiotoc, ’Axpiovdyn. It is to be -re- marked, that the termination ¢¥7 arises when the primitive has a consonant before its own termination, and the termi- nation 1@v_7 when the primitive has before its ending the voweltorv. © XXII. ADJECTIVES. 1. The declensions of adjectives are three. 2. The first declension of adjectives has three termina tions; the second, two; the third, one. 3. Adjectives of three terminations are the most numer- ous, and have the feminine always in 7, except when pre- ceded by a vowel or the letter p, in which cases it ends in a. Thus: dethéc, ded, derddv, ‘ cowardly ;” xaA6c, Kadn, Kaddv, ‘handsome ;” copéc, ocoph, copéy, “wise.” ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATE&ONS. 49 But, ' piisoc, gpidia, gdidov, “ friendly ;” Gywoc, dyla, dywov, “holy;” lepdc, lepd, lepdv, ‘ saered.” . The masculine termination in o¢ and the nguter in oy are eee after the second declension of, nouns. The feminine termination in 7 or a is inflected after the first de- clension of nouns. - 5. Adjectives in oo¢, however, have the feminine in 7; as, dydooc, dydéq; VYodc, FoR. But, when p precedes, these have also a; as, ddpdoc, a0 péa. 1. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 1. Termination in oc. copéc, “ wise.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N. o06-6¢, -7, -6”, N. cog-6, -d, -0, | N. aog-oi, -ai, “a, G. cog-00, -fr, -00, G. co9-oiv, -aiv, -oiv, G. aog-dy, -dr, ~iv, D. cvg-G, -7, -9, D. cog-oiv, -alv, -oiv, D. cog-oic, -aic, -oi¢, A. cog-dv -7v, -dv, A. gog-0, -d, -0, A. oo¢- ove, “6 -d, V. cog-é, -7, -dv V. cog-6, -d, -. | V. cog-0l, -ai, -é lepdc, “ sacred.” Singular. Dual. Plural. N. lep-6¢, -d, -0v, N. lep-d, -d, “0, N. lep-of, -al, -é, G. lep-od, -dc, -dv, G. lep-otv, -aiv, -oiv, | G. lep-Gv, -dv, -dv, D. lep-9, -¢, -@, D. lep-oiv, -aiv, -oiv, D. lep-oie, -aic, -oi¢, A. lep-dv, -dv, -dv, A. lep-0, -d, -0, A. lep-ov¢, ~de, -d, V. lep-é, -d, -dv. V. lep-6, -d, -0. V. lep-oi, -ai, -d 2. Termination in e0c. Adjectives in cog are contracted throughout. In the fem- inine, ea is contracted into a when a vowel or the letter p precedes the termination o¢ ; but otherwise it is contracted into 7. In the neuter plural, however, ea is always con- tracted into a, whatever letter may-precede o¢. Thus: 50 ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 2 xpbococ, contr. ypvaovc, “ golden.” Singular. Dual. N. ypto-eo¢, -éa, -éov, N. ypvo-éu, -éa, -a, ove, Ns ovr, O, d, 6, G. ypvo-éov, -éac, -éov, G. ypvo-éorv, -éarv, ory, 7 ov, NC; ov, oiy, aiv, oiv, D. xpvo-éy, -ég, «= Ey D. ypvo-éoww, -éatv, -éowr, ; 9, @, oi, aiv, oiv, A. xpto-eov, -éav, 4-éor, A. xpvo-év, -éa, -éw, ovr, qv, ovr, O, a, o, V.ypto-ee, -éa, -€or, V. xpva-év, -éa, -é0, I, ovy. 0, a, o. Plural N. xpvo-cot, -éal, -ea, oi, ai, a, G. ypvo-éwr, = -Ewv, ~— -Ew?, Ov, ov, Gy, D. ypvo-éowp, -éarc, -é0tC, oi¢, ai¢, ott, A. xpvo-éove, -éae, -ea, ots, ae, d, V. xpto-eot, -éat, _-ea, oi, ai, a. 3. Termination in ooc. 1. Adjectives in 6o¢ are contracted throughout like those in eoc. In the feminine 67 is contracted into 7, and in the neuter plural da into @. | 2. When the letter p precedes the termination, the fem- inine is in 6a contracted d. But the adjective d&Opooc, “‘ crowded,” is not contracted in the feminine d6péa, to dis- tinguish it from the adjective dOpove, “ noiseless,” which is of two terminations. arAdo¢, contr. dtrAove, “ simple.” Singular. Dual. N. d1A-6o¢, -67; -60v, N. drA-6u, -6a, -da, ove, ‘DB ovr, O, a, O, G. dzA-éov, -6n¢, -dov, G. drA-doww, -datv, -dour, v Cy ov, oy, air, oiv, D. dz-dy, ~oy, 6), D. drA-dow, -datv, -dow, Q, 9, 0, otv, aiv, oi, A. arA-éor, -6nv, -dor, A. drA-6a, -6a, -6a, our, iY; our, Oo, a, G, V. dx2-6e, si -60”, V. érA-du, ~6ay ba, t ody. }, a, é. Von ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 51 Plural. N. ara-éot, -6at, -6a, ol, ai, a, G. drA-dwv, -dwr, -dwr, Ov, Ov, Oy, D. ara-dotg, -datce, -dore, otc, atc, ott, A. drA-éove, — -dag, -6a, ove, ae, a, V. drA-dot, -6at, -6a, oi, ai, a. 4. Termination in ac. 1. Adjectives in ag have ava in the feminine, and av in the neuter; but participles in a¢ have the feminine in aoa. 2. The adjective mae, “ all,” “ every,” is declined like a participle. pédac, * black.” Singular. Dual. N. péA-ac, -aiva, — =av, N. péA-ave, -aiva, -ave, G. péA-avog, -aivac, -avoc, G. ped-crov, -aivaw, -dvorv, D. péA-avi, = -aivg, = av, D. pea-dvoty, -aivary, -dvocv, A. pédA-ava, = -atvav, -ar, A. péd-ave, -aiva, -ave, V. péd-ac, saliva, = -av. V. pédA-ave, -aiva, -ave. Plural. N. uéA-avec, -atvat, -ava, G. peA-dvur, -avdv, -dvur, D. péd-act, -aivaic, -act, A. péd-avas, -aivac, -ava, V. méd-avec, -atvat, -ava. Trinpac, “having struck.” Singular. Dual. N. rip-ac, -aoa, -ay, N. Thp-avre, -doa, -avre, G. rby-avros, -donc, -avToc, G.-ruyp-dvroww, -doawy, -dvroww, D. riw-avtt, -doy, -avtt, D. rvy-dvrowv, -doaw, -dvtow, 4 ia A. Tinp-avra, -aoayv, -ay, A. rvy-ayre, -doa, -avTe, V. rinb-ag, -aoa, -ayv. V. rip-ayte, -doa, -ayrte. Plural. N. rinp-avrec, -acat, -avra, G. rup-dvtwv, -aodv, -dvTwr, D. rinp-act, = -doats, -aot, A. Tinp-aytac, -doag, -avTa, V. riib-avrec, -acat, -ayra, 52 Trac, “all,” “ every.” ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. ~ Singular. Dual. N. wae, waoa, way, N. wdvte, «doa, navrte, G. ravréc¢, mdong, mTavréc, G. xdvrow, macatyv, mdavroty, D. xavti, xndoy, dvi, D. wavrow, mdoay, mavroty, A. madvta, ndoav, av, A. xdvre, ‘doa, Tarte, ~~ ~ ~ a A o V. rae, nGoa, way. V. xavrTe, «doa, qwdvte. Plural N. rdvrec, maoat, mdvra, G. révtwv, nacdv, rdvTwr, . D. sdaot, maga, Tdot, é A. wdvrac, macac, ndvra, 4 ~ V. wdvrec, mGoat, méyvra. 5. Termination in etc. Adjectives in ec¢ make the feminine in eooa and the neuter in ev. Participles in ec¢ make the feminine in evoa. xapletc, “ comely.” Singular. Dual. N. yapi-ers, -eooa, -ev, N. yapi-evre, -éooa, -evre, G. yapi-evrog, -éoong, -evToe, G. yapt-évrocy, -éooaty, -évrosy, D. yapi-evti, -éoon, -evrt, D. yapt-évroty, -Eooaty, -évrow, A. xapi-evra, -ecoav, -ev, A. yapi-evte, -éooa, -evre, V. yapi-er, or -e00a, -ev. V. yapi-evre, -éooa, -evre Xapi-ev, Plural. N. yapi-evrec, -eocat, -evra, we G. yapt-évrwy, -ecodv, -évTwr, J D. yapi- eat, -EGOaLC, -E0L, . A. wapi-evra¢, -ésoac, -evTa, . V. xapi-evgec, -f00al, -evTa. tupbeic, “ struck.” Singular. Dual. N. rv¢6-eic, -eioa, -éy, N. rug6-évre, -cica, dyre, G. rvg6-évroc, -eionc, -évTos, G. rug6-évrowv, -eicay, -évroww, D. rvg6-évti, -eiog, -év Tt, D. rvg6-évrowv, -eicatv, -éwrow, A. rud6-évta, -eicav, -év, A. rud6-évte, -eica, -évre, V. rug0-2ic, —-eioa,-év. V. rug-évte, -eioa, -évre. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 53 eo: - Plural. tug6-évrec, -eieat, . TU98-EvTwy, -eLodi, . TudO-ciot, -eicate, . Tvg6-Evrac, -eicag, . TugO-évtec, -eioat, <> uaZ -évra, -&vTur, -eiot, -vTd, -évTa. The termination etc, belonging to this head, is often contracted. Thus, -7jet¢, -je00a, -nev, are contracted into 4S, 00a, 7) ; as, for example, N. Ti-qe, Tut-jooa, G. Tiu-7vTo¢, Tiu-hoons, TUL-NY, | Tiut-nvToc, &c. 6. Termination in nv. Adjectives in 7v have the feminine in ecva and the neu- terin ev. Of these, however, we find only one form exist- ing in Greek, namely, tépyv, réperva, téper. tépny, “ tender.” Singular. Dual. N. rép-7y, -elLva, == EV, N. rép-eve, -eiva, -eve, G. rép-evoc, -eivng, -evoe, G. rep-évotv, -eivaty, -évowy, D. rép-evt, -eivy, = -evt, D. rep-évowv, -eivaty, -évory, A. rép-eva, -elvay, -ev, A. rép-eve, -eiva, -eve, V. rép-ev, ceva, -ev. “| V.rép-eve, -eiva, -eve. Plural. N. rép-evec, -etvat, G. rep-Evwy, -etvar, D. rép-eot, —-eivaie, A. rép-evac, -eivac, V -Eva, -Evar, : -E0l, “Eva, . TEP-EVEG, -ELVQL, Eva. 7. Termination in detc, contracted ove. Adjectives in dete are contracted throughout, and form the féminine in édeoca, contr. ovooa, and the neuter in der, confr. ovy. E 2 . *, 64 ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. pedrréecc, contracted peAttouc, “ made of honey.” Singular. Dual. N. pedtt-dee, -deooa, ~dev, N. peder-devte, -deooa, ~devre, ove, ovooa, ovr, ovvTe, ovoca, ovrTe, G. pedit-devroc, -oéa0n¢, -devtoc, |G. pedir-devrow, -decoaty, ~Gevrow, ovvToc, ovoonc, ovvTo¢, OvYTOLY, OVOCALY, ovvToLY, D. pedsr-devtt, -ofcoy, -devtt, |D. wedct-devrorw, ~decoaty, -devroty, ovyrt, ovooy, ovrrt, OvYTOLY, OVOOaLY, OvYTOLY, A. pedit-devta, ~deooav, -6er, : pedtr-devte, -6eooa, -devTe, ovvTa, ovocar, ov, ovrTe, ovcoa, ovvre, Vi. pedct-dev, -6e00a, ~6eu, V. peder-devte, -6e00a, -devre, » oby, ovoca, ov». ovvTe, ovooa, ovrrTe. Plural. N. pedur-devrec, -d@soat, -devra, ovvtec, ofocat, ovvTa, G. pedetr-devrwr, -decowv, -devTwr, otyTayv, ovoowy, odrTar, ee D. peact-deot, -6eocatc, -deat, over, ovooatc, otc, : A. pedit-devrac, -deoaag, -devTa, ovvTac, ovooac, otyrTa, V. pedut-Oevrec, -decoat, -devra, ovvTEe¢, ovocal, ovrTa. 8. Termination in ove uncontracted. This form belongs to participles, and makes the feminine in ovoa and the neuter in ov. dove, “ having given. Singular. N. dove, dovo-a, ddr, G. dovt-o¢, dove-n¢¢ dévt-o¢, N. dévt-e, Dual. dovo-a, dv T- &, G. dévt-otv, doto-av, ddévr-owv, D. dévr-t, dovto-7, ddvr-t,. D. dowr-otv, dotc-atv, dévr-owv, A. dévr-a, dovo-av, dév, A. dévr-e, dovo-a, Jdévr-e, V. dove, dotc-a, 5 V. dévt-e, dqto-a, dévr-e. Plural. : N. dévt-e¢, dovo-at, dévr-a, G. dévt-wy, dove-dv, dévt-wy, D. dote-t, dova-atc, dotvo-t, A. dévt-ac, dota-ag, dévr-a, V. dd6vt-e¢, dota-at, dévr-a. 9. Termination gn ve. 1. Adjéctives in ve make the feminine in efa and the ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 66 Neuter in &. They also contract ef into et, and ée¢ and éac nto Efe. - 2. Participles in v¢ make the feminine in voa and the weuter in vy. HOvcG, ‘ sweet.” Singular. Dual. N. 70-t¢, -eia, -4, . n0-ée, -eia, G. 76-éo¢, -elag, ~E0¢, . 76-Eow, -etaty, D. 40-éi, -eig, § -&i, . 96-Eowv, -eiary, A. 96-tv, -eiav, = ~-%, . 90-ée, -eia, <> 00224 V.96-0, -eia, -v. . 40-ée, -eia, Plural N. 76-éec, -eiat, -éa, AF. tic, Sevyvic, “joining.” ‘Singular. Dual. N. Cevyv-te, -toa, -tyv, N. evyy-tyre, -taa, G. Cevyr-tvrog, -donc, -vvToc, G. Cevyv-tvrotv, -voaty, D. Cevyv-tyri, -toy, -trTt, D. Cevyrv-tyrouy, -toatv, A. Cevyv-tvra, -toav, -vr, A. Cevyy-tvre,, -0 1a, V. evyr-te, -toa, -tv. 1 V. Gevyy-tvre, -toa, Plural. N. Cevyv-tvrec, -toat, -dbvra, G. Cevyy-tytar, -vodv, -bvTur, D. evyr-tot, -toats, -tot, : _ A. Cevyv-tvrac, -toac, -tvra, V. Cevyv-tvrec, -toat, -tvta. 10. Termination in wv. -f €; ob oly, -éolv, -ée, -ée. -byre, -vvTOLY, -bvTOLy, -byre. 9 tA “UV TE e The termination in wy makes ovoca in the feminine and ovin the neuter. ‘There are but two adjectives of this ter- mination, namely, éx@v, with its compound dékwy, con- tracted by the Attics inte dxwy. All the other forms in wv are participles, 56 t ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. Exov, “ willing.” Singular. Dual. N. éx-dy, -ovoa, -by, N. éx-6vTe, -ovoa, -OvTe, v4 A 4 o G. éx-dvTog, -ovons, -6vTo¢, G. éx-6vToLv, -ovealy, -OVvTOLY, D. éx-évt1, -ovoy, -6rTt, D. éx-6vrowv, -otcatv, -dvroww, A. ék-6vta, -stoav, -dy, A. éx-6vtTe, -ovcoa, -dérTe, V. éx-dv, -ovoa, -6v. V. éx-6vre, -ovoa, -dévTe. Plural. N. éx-6vre¢, -ovtoat, -dvrTa, G. éx-6vTwr, -ovodyv, -dvTuar, D. éx-otot, -ovoaic, -ovct, A. éx-évrag, -ovoas, -dévTa, V. éx-évrec, -otoat, -dvTa. id e ° TUnTWY, “ striking.” Singular. Dual. N. rirr-wv, -ovoa, -ov, N. runr-ovre, -otoa, -ovte, G. rinr-ovtoc, -ovonc, -ovToe, G. rurr-dvrowv, -otcaty, -dvToty, eA 7 tA v4 D. rérr-ovrt, -otcy, -ovrt, D. rurr-dvroty, -ovoaty, -dvToly, eo A. rirr-ovta, -ovoay, -ov, A. rint-ovre, -ovoa, -ovTe, A V. rint-wy, -ovoa, -ov. V. réxt-ovte, -ovoa, -ovre. Plural. N. rinr-ovTec¢, -ovoat, -ovtTa, G. rurr-évtwv, -ovody, -dvTwr, D. rinr-ovot, -otvoatc, -ovet, A. rénr-ovtag, -ovoag, -ovTa, V. rint-ovTec, -ovoat, -ovTa. Some participles in dy, contracted from dwy, make the feminine in @ca and the neuter in @v. Thus: Tydwy, contracted Tiway, “ honouring.” Singular. N. ti-dov, — -dovoa, OV; ooa, G. tiu-dovroc, -dovone, GvTOC, Gone, D. riy-dovtt, -dovey, Gvrt, Gon, A. tiy-dovra, -dovoar, @YTA, @oay, V. try-duv, —-dovoa, a doa, Dual. N. rip-dovre, -dovoa, -dovte, QVTe, oa, Ovre, G. rip-dovrowv, -dovoaty, -dovrory, GVTOLY, Woav, Gyrotr, D. rip-dovrotv, -doveary, -dovro.y, Gyroty, Goa, Gyro, A. tTy-dovTe, -dovoa, -dovre, OVTE, aoa, Gvre, V. tryrdovre, -dovoa, -dovte, Ovre, Goa, Ovre. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 67 Plural. N. rip-dovrec, GYTES, G. ry-dovrwr, -doveat, OCal, = -aovowyr, Woar, -doveate, @oaic, -dovoae, @oas, -dovoat, oat, a sali ovra, ¢ 11. Termination in we. This termination also belongs to participles. The fem- inine is in via and the neuter in 6¢. . TETUG-OC, QZ . TeTvg-OTt, . TeTug-6Ta, TETU-WE,

TeTugec, “ having struck.” Singular. -via, -6d¢, . TeTug-6T0¢, -viac, -dTo¢, -vig, -6Tl, ~viay, -0¢, via, -0¢.

&c. GAnOne, “ true.” Singular. Dual, N. dAnO-7¢, -e, —-ée, N. GAn6-ée, -ée, -ée, i; 9 I, G. GAn6-éo¢, -&o¢c, -éog, G. dAn6-éowv, ~orv, -éowy, ov¢, ov, ove, oitv, oiv, oir, D. GAnO-éi, -i, ~— -i, D. dAnO-éowv, -éowv, -Eowv, ez, ei, ei, oiv, otv, oi», A. dAnO-éa, -éa, -é, A. GAnO-ée, -&, -&2, UE 7h, th, 7, lls V. GAnO0-&¢, -&, — -&. V. GAnO-ée, -é, -ée, ty 7, jj. Plural. N. aAy6-ec, -é&e¢, -éa, eg, et, 7, G. dA76-éwv, -éwv, -éwr, Gv, Gy, a), D. GAn6-éor, -éot, -éot, A. dAnO-éac, -éac, -éa, ete, V. GAnO-ée¢, -éec, -éa, ig, ett, jj. 5. Termination tn tc. ebyapic, “ acceptable.” Singular. Dual. N. etyap-ic, -l¢, -t, N. ebydp-tre, -tTe, -tTe, G. ebydp-tro¢, -tTo¢, -tTO¢, G. ebyap-irowv, -itow, -trow, D. ebydp-trt, tT, «= TL, D. ebyap-irowv, -irowv, -lrow, A. ebxdp-tra, ) -tTa, or or “lt, A. ebydp-ire, -tTe, -=tTe, -ly, “ty, V. ebyap-t, ot; ol V. ebydp-irs, ite, -bT8. ~ 60 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. Plural. ‘ N. ebydp-rec, -irer, -tra, G. ebyap-itwy, -irwv, -itav, D. ebydp-ict, © -tot, -tot, A. ebydp-trac, -tTrac, -tTa, V. ebydp-tres, -tTec, -tTa. 6. Termination in ove. Adjectives in ove of two terminations have the accu- sative singular in -oda or -ovy, and the vocative in -ove or -ov. ditrove, “ two-footed.” Singular. Dual. N. dix-ovc, -0ug, -ovv, | N. dix-ode, -ode, -ode, G. dix-odo¢, -od0¢, -odog, G. dtx-6dowv, -édorv, -bdory, D. din-odt, -o6t, -06dt, D. dix-ddowv, -ddorv, -ddorv, A. dir-oda, -00a, or or -OuUy, A. dim-ode, -ode, -ode, -OU), “OUP, V. dizx-ovg, -0v¢, or or “our. V. din-ode, -ode, -ode. -0v, -0v, Plural. N. din-ode¢, -odeg, -oda, G. din-édwr, -ddwrv, -dduv, D. dir-oot, -o0, -00t, A. din-edac, -odag, -oda, V. dim-ode¢, -odec, -oda. 7. Termination in ve. Adjectives in v¢ of two terminations contract vec and vac into v¢. ddaxpue, “ tearless.” Bingular. Dual. 'N. ddaxp-ue, “UC, +0, N. dddxp-ve, -ve, ve, G: addxp-voc, -voc, -vos, G. ddaxp-dow, -tow, tory, D.-dédxp-vi, -vl, -vi, D. ddaxp-dorv, -dorw, -vow, ~ A. Gdaxp-vy, -vv, -v, A. dddxp-ve, -ve, —_-ve, V. édaxp-v, -vy, ~-v. V. Gddxp-ve, -ve, ve. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 61 N. dédxp-veg, -vec, -va, G. &daxp-buv, “Uw, UY, D. &déxp-vot, -vot, -vot, A. dddxp-vac, -vac, -va, = : ve, ue, V. dddxp-vec, -veg, -va. Ue, —s- UE. 8. Termination in wv. owdpwy, “ discreet.” N. cdgp-wv, -r, -0v, N. od¢p-ove, -ove, -ove, G. cadp-ovoc, -ovoc, -ovog, G. cwdp-évorv, -dvorv, -dvec, D. oddp-ovr, -ovt, -ovt, D. owgp-évorv, -bvowv, -dvoty, A. od¢p-ova, -ova, -ov, . A. cogp-ove, -ove, -ove, V. oGdp-ov, -0v, -ov. V. odgp-ove, -ove, -ove. Plural. N. oddp-ovec, -ovec, -ova, G. cugp-dvur, -dvev, -dvur, D. cdgp-oct, -00t, -oat, A. o@gp-ovac, -ovac, -ova V. cddp-ovec, -ovec, -ova. Under this same head fall comparatives in wy, which. are declined like owppwy; except that they are syncopated and contracted in the accusative singular, and in the nom- inative, accusative, and vocative plural. Thus: petowy, “ greater.” Singular. Dual. N. peil-ov “WY, -Ov N. petl-ove, -ove, -ove, | G. sit oor, -0v0e, -ovoe, G. pet-dvoww, -évouy, hoor, D. peit-ovt, -Ovl, -OVL, D. pel-dvowv, -bverv, -dvorv, A. peil-eva, -0va, ) -Ov, -0@ syncope, oa, A. peil-ove, -ove, -ove, -@ Crasis, -W, V. petl-ov, -0v, 0”. V. pell-ove, -ove, -ove. 62 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. Plural. N. peil-ovec, -OVvEt, -ova, ~08¢, syncope, -0€¢, -0a, -ove, crasis, -0v¢, ~W, G. petl-ovwr, “OVWV, -OVWY, D. petl-oot, -00t, -00t, A. petl-ovac, “ovat, ) -ova, ~oa¢, eyncopaah ~0dt, ~0a, -Oug, Crass, |; -0ut, -W, V. pect-ovec, : Ove, -ova, -08¢, syncope, -0€¢, -0a, -OUG, crasis, -0vs, 0. 9. Termination in wp. peyadnrup, “ magnanimous.” Singular. Dual. N. peyadjt-wp, -wp, -0p N. peyaagjr-o G. peyadhr-opoc, -opo¢, ~opos, G. iehar Goaek a Br ae D. peyaAnr-opt, -opt, -opt, D. peyaAnr-dpotv, -dpowv, -dpory, A. peyaAnr-opa, -opa, -op, A. peyadgjr-ope, “ope, -0pe, V. peydAnr-op, -0p, -op. V. peyadAnt-ope, -ope, ope. ‘Plural. N. saber bl fi ~opsc, -opa, G. peyadnt-dpwr, -opwr, -dpwr, D. peyadgr-opet, -opot, -opot, A. peyadnt-opac, -opac, -opa, V. peyadyr-opec, -opec, -opa. 10. Termination in wc. evyews, “ fertile.” Singular. Dual. N. ebye-we, -we, -w, N. ebye-w, -0, -o, G. evye-w, -0, -0, G. ebye-pr, -pv, -r, D. ebye-y, -%, 9 D. ebye-qv, -pv, -yv. A. ebye-wy, -aV, -0r, A. evye-W, -0, -0; V. evye-we, -ws, -Ov. V. ebye-w, -w, -o. Plural, N. etye-@, “Y, -Q, G. ebye-wy, = =-wr, = -w, D. ebye-ye, —-y WS, A. ebye-wr, “Wf, dy, V. evye-y, -Y, oie ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. -63 3. ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. Adjectives of one termination, namely, which express the masculine, feminine, and neuter by one and the same ending, are the cardinal numbers from 7évre, “ five,” to éxaroév, “a hundred,” both inclusive. Others have indeed only one termination, but for the _masculine and feminine merely, since they are not used with substantives of the neuter gender, at least in the nom- inative and accusative singular and plural. They are properly of the common gender, wanting the neuter.! Such are, 1. Adjectives compounded of substantives which remain unchanged ; as, paxpéyelp, abroyep, evply, paxpaiwy, pa- kpatyny, from yelp, piv, aldv, and atyfyv, except those compounded of trove and 7éAtc, which have two termina- tions. ) ~ 2. Adjectives in wp, which are partly derived from 7rar7jp and parnp; as,ardtwp, duntwp, duountwp ; and partly from verbs; as, TaldoAétwp, duoyevétwp, pidoTwp. 3. Adjectives in NS, genitive -7To¢, and in we, genitive “WTOC; as, duns, NuLOvic, dyvac, wpobpac. 4. Adjectives in m1y¢ and T7¢, according to the first de- clension; as, evamrnc, &0eAovrhc. . 5, Adjectives in & and a, as, 7Aré, poivié, alyiAup, albior. 6. Adjectives in ac, genitive -adoc, and in ¢¢, genitive -t00¢; as, puyac, avadksc. ANOMALOUS ADJECTIVES. 1. Originally some adjectives had two forms, of both of which certain cases have been retained in use, so that the 1. Some of these, however, are also used as neuters, but only in the enitive and dative singular and plural; as, audctp7ro¢g abAiov, Soph. hiloct. 19 ; év wévyte odpart, Eurip. El. 375 ; arrijow réxeot, Euen. Epigr.13. In other words, the neuter, when necessary, is supplied by derivative or kindred forms; as, BAaKixdv, dpraxrixdy, povuxor, &o. — 64 ANOMALOUS ADJECTIVES. cases which are wanting in one form are supplied by those of the other. Of this kind are péyac or peydAoc, and 76- Ave or TroAAdc. \ 2. From peydAoc, the feminine peydéAn has remained in use throughout, as well as the entire dual and plural, and the genitive and dative masculine and neuter of the singu- lar number. The remaining cases, the nominative and ac- cusative singular, masculine and neuter, are taken from pé- ya. 3. In wéAve, the feminine and the dual and plural num- bers are entirely taken from rroAAéc. péyac, “ great.” -pEyas, = peyadn, a peyddw, peydia, pey Plural. N. peyddot, peyddar, eydda, : Hey D. peyddote, neyéAaic, peyaAoce, A. peydAovg, peyddac, peydda, V. peyddot, peyddAa, peydda. troAte, * much.” Singular. Dual. N. rodAvc, wodan, odd, N. road, woAAd, sWoAAd, G. roAAob, moAAijc, moAAcd, G. moAAoiv, woAAaiv, 1roAAoty, D. 1oAdG, §=moAAp, oA, D. roAdoiv, roAdaiv, rroAAoiv, A. wodtv, modAAnv, TOAD, A. ToAAG, TOoAAd, FOAAA, V. oat, woaaj, odd. V. moAAd, moAAd, moAAd. Plural. N. woaAAoi, moddAai, sodAd, G. mwoAAGv, wodAay, ToAAdy, D. roAdoic, modadaic, roAdoic, A. woAAotc, mwoAdAdc, «woAAd, V.moAdoi, moddai, moAAd. 1. Many forms from 7éAve occur, however, in the poets. Thus, the nitive woAéo¢, Il. 4, 244; the nominative plural woAéec, I]. 2, 610; Me genitive plural roAéwy, Il. 5, 691; the dative roAéotv, Il. 4, 388, &c REMARKS ON THE TERMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 65 The adjective @AAo¢ is anomalous only in this, that it has EAAo in the neuter instead of dAAov. REMARKS ON THE TERMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 1. Adjectives in -atoc, having the vowel ¢ before aioc, denote magnitude or value, and are derived from the names of measures, weights, coins, and denominations of money ; as, thxutaioc, “a cubit long ;” rodtatoc, “a foot long ;” tadavriaioc, “costing a talent ;” &c. ‘Those in aioc, on the other hand, which have not ¢ before aio¢, generally de- note the place where something has originated, or to which it belongs ; as, m7yaioc, “ proceeding from,” or, “ belonging ‘to, @ fountain ;” dyedaioc, “ belonging to a herd;” kopv- daioc, “one who ts at the head.’ Some, however, denote merely a quality ; as, ceAqvaioc, “ moon-shaped ;” elpnvatoc, “« peaceable.” 2. Adjectives in -dAeo¢ mostly express a fulness; as, Sappadsoc, “ full of confidence ;” deywareoc, “ full of fear.” 3. Adjectives in -avo¢ mostly signify the possession of the quality expressed by the primitive; as, mevxedavdc, “ bitter ;” puyedavec, “ that which causes shuddering.” 4. Adjectives in -eco¢ commonly express an origin or source ; as, yfvetoc, Bdetog, Immetoc, wnAetoc, &c., “ consist- ing of,” or, “derived from, geese, cattle, horses, sheep,” &c. - Others denote rather an agreement with, or resemblance to, a thing ; as, dvdpeloc, “ becoming a man ;” yuvatketoc, “ ef- Seminate,” or, * becoming a woman.” 5. Adjectives in -eoc, contracted ove, express the mate- rial ; as, ypvacoc, -ovc, “ made of gold ;” Atveoc, -ovc, “ made of linen,” &c. 6. Adjectives in -epo¢ and -7poc¢ signify quality general- ly-; as, doAepéc, “ crafty ;” oxtepdc, “ shady,” &c. Some express a propensity; as, olvnpdc, “ given to wine ;” ka- patnpéc, “ laborious,” “ prone to labour.” Others, again, have an active signification ; as, vooepéc, or voonpdc, “ cau- sing sickness ;” dxAnpéc, “ causing disqutet ;” vyinpde, * con- tributing to health.” 7. Adjectives in -jet¢ signify fulness; as, devdp7jecc, “ full of trees ;” rouherc, “ full of grass ;” vAhec, “full of wood.” 8. Adjectives in -7Ao0¢ signify a propensity to, and capa- bility or fitness for, anything ; as, dmatnAdc, “prone to de- F 2 - t 66 REMARKS ON THE TERMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES. ceit ;” trrvnddc, “prone to sleep” To this the idea of ful- ness is nearly allied ; as, ddpnAdc, “ watery.” 9. Adjectives m -:to¢ most commonly denote fitness or capability for anything ; as, 7yewovendc, “ fit for command ;” aubepyytinoc, “ fit for piloting,” &c. Other meanings are, 1. belonging to anything ; as, owwartKoc, “ corporeal ;” spv- yxdc, “ spiritual ;” 2. coming from anything; as, trarpl- c6c, “‘ derived from forefathers,” “ hereditary ;” Boixéc, “ made of ox’s hide.” lJ. Adjectives in -cuo¢ are of two classes, one derived from: nouns and the other from verbs. ‘Those from verbs have soinetimes an active, sometimes a passive significa- tion , as, pvdiwoc, “one who flees ;” dAdoipoc, “ pertaining to capture ;” dpwousoc, “ arable ;” Bpwouroc, “ edible.” Other adjectives in -4zo¢, however, express merely a quality; as, méev6.uoc, ‘* mournful ;” ddxipoc, “ celebrated,” &c. 11. Aujectives in -cvog and -etvoc signify, 1. a material of which anything is made; as, yfivoc, “ made of earth ;” Kaddptvoc, ‘made of reeds ;” AlvOtvoc, “ made of ttles,” é&c:; 2. a quality which arises from the magnitude or quan- tity of the uhing expressed by the derivation ; as, tredzvéc, “level ;” dpervdc, “ mountainous ;” oKoretvc, “ dark,” &c. 12. Adjectives in -to¢ express a quality generally; as, éorréptoc, “ pertaining to evening ;” Saddooroc, “ marine ;” owrnpioc, “ saving.” lf two adjectives are derived from one substantive, one in coc and the other in oc, the latter expresses a quality generally ; the former denotes a prone- ness or tendency to that quality; as, xa@apdc, “ pure ;” Kabdptoc, “ loving purity.” 13. Adjectives in -des¢ and -weic signify a fulness ; as, pnrederc, “ full of prudent counsels ;” durreAdetc, “ full of vines.” The termination @ecc is used when the penult is long ; as, KnTWEs¢, WTHELC, &c. 14. Adjectives in -adn¢ express, 1. a fulness; as, srot- ddne, “ grassy ;" dvOeuadne, “ flowery ;” 2. a resemblance ; as, opnKadne, “‘ wasplike ;” pAoyadne, “ shining like fire ;” dvdpadne, “manly.” In this sense these adjectives coin- cide with those in -oe:d7#¢, and are probably formed from them. 15. Adjectives in -wAo¢ signify a propensity or tenden- cy to anything ; as, duaptwAdc, “ prone to sin ;” wevdwd6e, “prone to lying.” DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 67. : DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 1. The property expressed by an adjective can usually be attributed to more objects than one. Yet it is seldom found exactly to the same extent in one as in another, but it is possessed by one in an usual degree, by another in a higher or in a pre-eminent degree. 2. Now, if one and the same property be attributed to two different objects, and these be compared with each other in reference to the measure of this property, there arises a new form of adjective, namely, the comparative. 3. But, if.a property exists in many objects, and one of them is to be distinguished as possessing this property in the greatest degree, this is also effected by a new form, called the superlative. 4. These two forms are called degrees of comparison ; and, for the sake of uniformity, a corresponding appella- tion has also been given to the simple form of the adjec- tive, namely, the positive. Strictly speaking, however, the positive is no degree of comparison, but merely the primi- tive form, on which the comparison is based. FORMATION OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. I. The degrees of comparison are formed from the pos- itive ; namely, the comparative, by appending the termi- nation -Tepoc, a, ov; and the superlative by appending -ta- TOC, 7, OV. II. These terminations are appended to the root of the positive in the following manner: 1. Adjectives in o¢ and vc throw away ¢; as, dewvéc, decvérepoc, dervératog ; evpic, evpbrepoc, evptTraroc. If the penultimate syllable of adjectives in o¢ is short in the positive, then o is changed into w in the comparative and superlative ; as, copdc, copwrepoc, copwratoc ; Kaba- p6s, kaBaparepoc, KaBapaTraroc.' 1. This rule about the penult of the positive appears to have been j 68 FORMATION OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. - 2. Adjectives in eoc, contracted ovc, form their compar ative and superlative regularly from the uncontracted pos itive, and then undergo contraction ; as, 7roppipeoc, contr Toppupovs, compar. ToppupewTEpoc, contr. TopPvpwTeEpos, superl. toppupewtaroc, contr. troppupw@iTaroc. 3. Adjectives in oo¢, contracted ovc, append -eorepoc, -£0TaTOo¢, to the root, and always contract this termination with the syllable that precedes ; as, evvooc, contr. evvoue, compar. (evvoéotepoc) ebvotorepoc ; superl. (evvoéoratoc) evvovoraroc. 4. Adjectives in -a¢, atva, av, append Tepoc and tato¢ to the neuter ; as, wéAac, peAdvrepoc, pedAdvraroc. 5. Adjectives in 7¢ and e¢ shorten these terminations into ec, and then append tepo¢ and taroc; as, dAnOfe, dAnbéorepoc, dAnGéotaros ; yapletc, yaptéotepoc, yaptéo- TATOC. 6. But adjectives in 7¢, genitive ov, of the first declen- sion, annex oTepo¢ and Lotarto¢ to the root; as, KAémrne, KAerriorepoc, KAetrioraros. | 7. Adjectives in wy append éorepoc and éorato¢ to the root ; as, DWPpwy, genitive owdpov-o¢, compar. owdpovéa- Tepoc, superl. cwHpovéoraroc. 8. Adjectives in 7v annex éotepoc and éoratoc to the neuter ; as, Tép7v, Tepevéotepoc, TEepevéeoTaroc. 9. Adjectives in & append forepoc and foraro¢ to the root, and sometimes éorepoc and éoraroc ; as, dpmaz, gen- itive dprray-o¢, compar. épraylorepoc, superl. dpraylora- Toc ; ajdt, genitive ddfAck-o¢, compar. ddnAckéorepoe, superl. ddnAtcéorartoc. Ill. Some dissyllabic adjectives in ve and po¢ reject caused by the conditions of hexameter verse, the oldest measure in the Greek language, and by which that language itself was first formed. Thus, for example, a comparative in drépo¢, with the preceding syllable short, consequently ~~~, would not have been admissible into the hexam- eter. The same objection would apply t6 a comparative in Grzpoc, with the preceding syllable long (except where another long syllable went be fore the latter), since the result would be ~~~”. EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING RULES. 69 these terminations, and use, in their stead, Zwy (neuter Zov) for the comparative, and ctoroc, 7, ov for ,the superlative. Thus, yAvxic, yAvetwv, yAdiniotoc ; aloxypéc, aloyiwr, aoxyLoroc. 1. The adjectives compared in the latter way are, how- ever, but few in number, neither is this mode of compar- ison exclusively used even in their case, since the com- mon terminations érepoc and ttepoc, étato¢ and vratoc, also occur. 2. Generally speaking, of those in poc, the formation tw, toroc, predominates only in aloypé¢ and éyOpdc¢ ; and of those in v¢, only in 7jd%¢ and tayic. In all the others, the regular form must be regarded throughout as the more usual. Thus Gpadirepoc is the more common form, where- as Bpadiwy occurs only in poetry. EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING RULES. 1. Some adjectives in o¢ reject o before tepo¢ and Ta- TOG ; a8, yepatde, yepatrepoc, ‘yepalratog ; TEpaioc, Tepal- tepoc, tepaitatoc, &c. The adjective dfAo¢ has for its usual forms fArepoc, diATato¢g ; besides which, however, dtAatrepoc, and even the regular @:AwTepoc and giAwraroc, are also found.' 2. Other adjectives, instead of o and w, have commonly at, or €¢, or t¢, before the comparative and superlative ter- minations ; as, péooe, peoalrepoc, peoalraros, idtoc, ldcairepoc, ldtairaroc, Tp@toc, mpwtaltepoc, mpwialtaroc. Eppopér oc, éppwueréotepoc, éppwpevéotaroc, adbovoc, adbovéorepoc, adbovéctaroc, dopuevoc, dopevéorepoc, douevéotaroc. 1. The three forms of the comparative and superlative of ¢iAo¢ appear to have been used by the ancients with a certain distinction in meaning. Thus, ¢iArepoc and ¢iAraroc signified ‘more friendly,” ‘dearest friend ;” gtAaitepos, “more dear,” “ more esteemed ;” and gtAcrepoc, — ‘‘ more beloved.’? This distinction, however, has not, in general, been strictly observed. Rost, G. G. p. 169. 70 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. AdAoc, Aadiorepoc, Aaxioraroc, TTWHOC, TTWXLOTEPO, nrTwxloTatoc. 3. In some of the adjectives which make the compara- tive in ewy and the superlative in coroc, the ¢ of the ending cwy is rejected, and the last letter of the root, if d, 8, «, or y, changes into oo (Attic rr). Thus, rayvc¢ (old form 6ay- vc), comparative tayiwy, changed to Ydoowy, Attic Bar- Twy. So, also, éAayvc, comparative éAayiwy, changed to éAdoowy, Attic &Adtrwy. In the same manner, also, must the comparative pdoowy, of uaxpdc, be explained. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. I. The comparative and superlative remain in several adjectives, whose positive has grown into disuse. These are noted most easily in connexion with some extant posi- tive, to which they approximate the nearest in respect of signification. Hence the following list : oe oa dpelwy, dptoroc. BeAtioy, BEATLOTOC. BéATEpoc, BeAraroc. Kpeloowy, kpe(tTwv, kpaTtoroc. Good. ayabéc, Kappy, Awiwy, Awlaorog. Aguwy, A@OTOG. péptaroc. péprepoc, péptoroc. pépttoroc. KAKGQTEPOC, KAKWTATOC. kaklwy, kaKLoTOC. Bad. naxéc, xepeluv, xeploros. xelpwr, xelptoroc. paxpotepos, pakpoTéroe. Long . paxpoc, ; pdoowy, pnKtoroc. péoowy, Great. péyac ’ pega, ey: toTo¢. pelfar, IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 71 pLKpoTEpoc, peor Epoc, Small. uxpoc, pelo, (éAaxtc), | éAdoowr, cowry, , TAEGY, Much. rodvc, Pia Easy. pddtoc, paw, petoroc. éAdyLoTo>. HKLOTOS. TAELOTOC. paoroc. 1. That these various forms were not used in exactly the same signification is certain ; but it is also equally cer- tain that no settled distinction between them was universal- ly observed. 2. The proper comparative and superlative of dyaGdc, namely, dya@a@repo¢ and dya0wraroc, occur only in later writers, and such as are not Attic ; as, for example, in Di- odorus Siculus, 16. 86. II. Some comparatives and superlatives are evidently de- rived from substantives, adverbs, and prepositions. ‘Thus: Compar. Supert. TpOTEpos, TPATOC, from 76. iréptepoc, wrréptatoc, “ brép. dvarepoc, avoraroc, “ dv. vorepos, VoTarToe, “rd. KAerttiotatoc, “ KAétrne. éraipétatoc, ‘ éraipoc. dovAdrepoc, “ dovAoc. Bactrebrepoc, “= BaatAsdc. To these may be added the following comparisons of ad- verbs. Thus: &vo, avarépw, aVWTATO, KETO KaTwTépw, KATOTETO, Eto, &iwrépw, &wrdro, tow, éowrépo, eowTdTo, Té6pp®, Toppwrépw, TroppwrdTw. {II. A few instances occur, where, to express a still 72 NUMERALS. higher gradation of an idea, a degree of comparison be- comes the positive to a new formation ; as, oyvaroc, “ last,” soxyaTurepoc, Eoxyatwraroc, “last of all ;” patos, “ first,” mpwttorToe, “ first of all,” “the very first.” IV. In many adjectives in Greek, as in other languages, the formation of a comparative and superlative from the root of the positive was not usual, but the gradation of idea was expressed by adding the adverbs yaAAov (“ more’) and pddsora (“ most”). Thus, tpwrdc, “ vulnerable,” tpw- Té¢ UGAAov, “ more vulnerable ;” Sunde, “ mortal,” drvnréc¢ uaAdov, “ more mortal ;” dijAoc, “ evident,” waAAov diAoc, “ more evident,” OjAoc pdAcora, “ most evident.” XXIII. NUMERALS. 1. Numerals are either Cardinal or Ordinal. 2. The cardinal numbers answer to the question, “ how many ?” as, ele, “one ;” Sto, “ two ;” Tpeic, “ three,” &c. 3. The ordinal numbers answer to the question, “ which in order ?” as, mp@roc, “ first ;” devrepoc, “ seeond ;” tptroc, “ third,” &c. 4. For marks of number the Greeks employ the letters of their alphabet ; but, to make the number complete, they insert therein a ¢ after e, called émionuoy, or Fav,' and an- swering to our 6; and they also adopt two Oriental char- acters, namely, Koppa, G for 90; and Sampi, 2 for 900.3 7. When the letters are employed to denote numbers, a — mark resembling an accent is placed over them; but to des- ignate the thousands the same mark is placed below. Thus, 1. The appellation oriyua is also sometimes given to this character. The name Foo refers to the circumstance of its occupying the place of the digamma in the alphabetic order. 2. The original mark for the xémma was 9, whence comes the Latin Q. The Zari is no doubt to be traced back in name to the old name for the letter ¢, namely ody, and appears to have been formed from the union of this letter with a 7, the early form of the Greek S having been C. Buttman thinks that the earlier name of the numeral in question was ay, and that Zazni came in as an appellation at a later period. NUMERALS. 73 & is one, but g one thousand. Sox’ is twenty, but « twenty thousand. . 8, These marks above and below the letters are not ex- pressed in the case of every letter, when we have several letters. placed side by side, and indicating a series of num- bers, but only over or below the last of each series. ‘Thus we write yyy" for 53,602 ; and gwA7 for 1838. 9. The following combinations may serve as examples of the Greek system of notation. javié, =-:141. - youc’, 3846. “Soté, 9265. kagd, 21,501. yon’, 3589. precy’, 155,203. (6@A6’, 7832. 70d’, 89,004. 10. In place of this system of notation, the Athenians adopted the following, which is far more striking to the eye. Thus: I, 1, is the mark of unity. IT, 2, | III, 3, ? express the other numbers above 5. III, 4, II, 5, is the initial of Iéyre. A, 10, as Aexa. H, 100, _t Hexaréy, the old form for éxatév. X, 1000, ae XlAtoe. M, 10,000, “ Movpvoe. The numbers between these are denoted partly by the combination of the above marks; as, AII for 12; AA for — 20; AAATIIIII for 39; and partly by the multiplication of A, H, X, M, into five IT, these marks being placed within the IT; as, A for rrevraxic déxa, five times ten, or 50; [AJA for 60; [Bl for 500; KX] for 5000; XJRJHHHAAATITII for 1838. This manner of notation is particularly to be marked, G 74 REMARKS ON THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. since it has been preserved in many and importatit Attic in- scriptions." DECLENSION OF THE FIRST POUR NUMERALS. Singular. Dual. ele, “ one.” dvo, “ two.” N.elc, peda, by, _N. d¥o and dtu, G. évég, putdc, = bv, G. dvoivy and dveiv, D. évi, sued, é, D. dvoty, A.&a, pilav, & A. dvo. Plural N. ‘ G. dvdv, D. dvei, A. —. ' Plural. Plural. tpetc, “ three.” téooapec, “ four.” N. rpeic, tpeic, pia, N. réooapec, réccapec, réoo G. rpry, TPLOY, TpLaY, G. recodpwr, Teccdpuy, say a D. rpioi, rpioi, pti, D. résoapat, réccapor, réocapot, A. tpeic, tpeic, pia. A. récoapas, trécoapas, técoapa. REMARKS ON THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. Ele. 1. In the epic writers the form la is found for uéa ; and only once i@ for évé. (Jl. 6. 422.) 2. From the composition of this numeral with ovdé and ndé arise the negative adjectives ovdeic and yndste, which are declined in the same manner ; as, nom. ovdeic, ovde- ula, ovdév ; genitive ovdevoc, ovdsuiac, ovdevoc, &q. ‘The later Greek writers make it ov@eic and p7Oeis, ouTe and pie, which, however, is not considered genuine Attic. 8. Ovdele and pndeic are often separated, and written ovdé elc, and pndé elc, &c., and this separation increases the negative signification. Thus, oidé ade, “‘ not even one ;” oud’ vp’ Evdc, “ not even by one,” &c. ; 4. The numeral elec, from its very nature, can have no plural, but ovdele and pndelc have ovdévec and pndévec, in the sense of “ insignificant,” “ of no value.” 1. For an account of the arithmetic of the Greeks, consult Delambre, Histoire de U ststronomie Ancienne, vol. ii., p. 3, seg. SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. 75 Avo. : 1. Avo is the Attic mode of writing. In Homer and Herodotus it is often indeclinable. Avety is of more rare ©ccurrence than dvoiy, and is only used in the genitive. Avoy is sometimes written dv@y, and regarded as Ionic for dvoiy. But dvwyv is preferable as a genitive plural.’ 2. Avw appears to have been, in fact, the dual number of the old form dudc. “Ayudw accords in great measure with dvw. In the old poets it is frequently indeclinable. Oth- erwise dudoiy is used in the genitive and dative. Téooapec. 1. Instead of téocapéc the Ionic dialect has réooepec, the Holo-Doric rétropes. Hesychius gives méoovpec as an Bolic form. 2. For réooapor or rérrapot in the dative, the form tér- pact occurs in the poets. SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. Cardinal. ; Ordinal. 1 ele, TPATOS, 2 dvo, dedrepoc, 3 Tpeic, Tpiros, 4 récoapes, Téraproc, 5 wévre, NELNTOC, 6 &5, “Exrog, 7 éxrd, 868006, 8 6xT0, (o0¢, 9 évvéa, Evy aro¢, 10 déxa, déxaroc, 11 tydexa, évdéxarog, 12 dadexa, dwdéxarog, 13 Tptoxaidexa, Tptoxadéxaroc, 14 Tegoapeckaidena, Tecoapaxatdéxarog, 15 mevreKaideka, TEVTEKALOEKATOC, ‘36 éxxaidexa, éxxacdéxarog, 17 éxraxaidexa, érraxadéxarog, 18 éxtwxaidexa, éxraxacdéxarog,. 19 évveaxaidexa, évveaxadéxareg, 20 elo, - eixoorég, 21 elxoory ele, elxooric mp&tog, 22 elxoot dv0, &c., eixooric devrepes, 30] A’| Tptdxovra, Tptaxooréc, SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. $1, Ad| rprdxovra elc, 3lst| tpraxoord¢g mpGrog, 40) p’| Treocapdxovra, 40th} reccapaxocroc, 50| »’| revryKovta, 50th} wevrnxoordc, 60 é€gxovra, tr éEnnooréc, 70| 0°] é6dousxovra, 7 &6dounxoords, 80) | bydonxovrta, 80th) dydoyxocrdc, 90} G’| évevnxovra, 90th] evevyxoordc, 100} p’| éxardy, 100th] éxaroorée, 200) o| dtaxdcrot, 200th) draxoctoords, 800) | Tptaxdcror, 800th| rpraxoctocrds, 400} v’'| reccapaxdoiot, 400th] recoapaxocioorés, 500} ¢’| wevraxdéciot, 600th! sevraxoctocréc, 600} x) é&axdor0:, 600th} éaxootooréc, 700} y| érraxdccot, 700th| érraxoctocroc, 800) w’| dxraxdorot, 800th} dcraxooocrde, 900] ‘D’| évvaxdoroz, 900th] évvaxocroordc, 1000] a] yiAzoz, 1000th| yeArocréc, 2000) B| droxiAror, 2000th| decxcArocréc, 3000) yj} TproxiAco:, 3000th| rproyAcocréc, 4000} 6) rerpaxicyiAcor, 4000th|. rerpaxurytAoaric, 5000) e¢]| revraxioxinior, 5000th| mevraxinyiAcoorég, 6000! ¢) éaxtoxiAcor, 6000th| éaxirylAiocroe, 7000) ¢| éxraxioyxiAcot, 7000th| érraxiayiAocrér, 8000| | dxraxioyidror, 8000th| duracurytAcocrée, 9000} 3 | evvaxcoyxidoc, 9000th| Avvaxiryx:Avocrég, 10,000} ¢| pvpcor, 10,000th} jevprooroc, 20,000} «,| dcopvpzot, 20,000th| dcopzvpocréc, 100,000] p,| dexaxcopdproc. 100,000th| dexaxiopuptocric. Mulvtiplicatives. drrAovc,! Simple, Ourdodc, Double, tpeTrAouc, Treble, TerparAove, Quadruple, wevtarAote, Five fold, : &c. Adverbs of Number. éraé, Once, dig, Twice, Tpic, Thrice, TETPGKLC, Four times, nee Five times, Cc. 1. For the declension of drAotc, which will serve as a guide to tl of the rest, see pege 50. ¢ t REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. Tt REMARKS ON THE NUMERAIS. 1. In compound numbers, either the less are put after ; the greater without a conjunction; as, elkoot tpetc, Tptd- aovra trévTe; or, what is most usual, the less precede and mare connected with the greater by xaf; as, Tpet¢ Kai elxoot, axévre Kai Tpidkovra. 2. So, also, in the more complicated numbers, the sev- eral parts are united in such a manner as to proceed from the less to the greater; as, rérrapa kai éb6doujKovta Kai évvaxdoia Kai tptoxyilua wai Efaxioutpra, which express 63,974. 3. For the greater numbers a numeral substantive is . frequently used with the requisite cardinal number ; as, déxa pvptddes, 100,000 ; tproylAcoe nai révte pvpiddec, 53,000, d&c. 4. In the case of tens compounded with 8 or @, the defi- nition is often given by subtraction ; as, rprdxovta dvoiv dedvroty or déovTa, 28; dydojKovta évdc déovroc, 79; or, if a substantive of the feminine gender stands therein, pd¢ deovone. 5. Of the cardinal numbers, the first four and the round numbers from 200 are alone declined. All the rest are indeclinable. | 6. The Latin distributives are expressed in Greek by compounding the cardinal numbers with ovy; as, oivdvo, “two by two ;” obvrpetc, “ three by three,” &c. 7. Besides the forms of ordinal numbers which have just been given in the synopsis, two ordinals are also frequently connected by «al; as, xéumroc nai dékatoc ; Sydo0¢ Kat déxatoc, &c. 8. ‘The smaller ordinal number is also sometimes pre- fixed to the greater cardinal or ordinal with xaf and a prep- osition ; as, TG «ry emi déxa, supply juspace, * on the sixth in addition to ten days,” 1. e.,“ on the sixteenth.” So, also, vq Exry per’ elxdda, “ on the twenty-sixth,” &c. 9. In order to express half or fractional numbers in mon- ey, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words com- pounded of the name of the weight, &c. (viz. uvd, d60A6¢, rédavroyv), with the adjective termination ov, cov, aiov, and jut, “ half,” and placed before them the ordinal number of which the half is taken. Thus, Téraprov 7juttdAav- tov, “3% talents,” i. e., the ae a talent, the second a tale 2 78 PRONOUNS. ent, the third a talent, the fourth a half-talent. So, also, tplrov tutuvatov, “24 mine,” Ebdouoy nuldpaypor, “ 64 drachme.” 10. From the foregoing, however, we must carefully distinguish such phrases as the following: tpia tpcra- Aavra, “14 talents,” i. e., three half-talents ; mévre 7utp- vaia, “24 mine,” &c. 11. From the ordinal numbers are derived, 1. Numerals in aioc, which commonly answer to the question, “ on what day ?” as, Tpttatoc, “on the third day ;” dexatatoc, “ on the tenth day.” 2. Multiple numbers in -pdovoc (besides those already mentioned in -7Aov¢); as, dipdotoc, tpipdotoc, &c. 3. Proportional3, answering to the question, “ how much more ?” as, ditAdotoc, tpiTtAdotos, TretparAdotoc, “ twice, thrice, four times as much.” XXIV. PRONOUNS. All pronouns serve to supply the place of a noun, but, at the same time, they give different relations of the substan- tive which they represent. According to these relations so expressed by them, they are divided into the following classes : 1. Personal Pronouns, which express the simple idea of person, and directly represent the same. These are, éyd, ZT, ov, thou, ov, of him. 2. Possessive Pronouns, which are formed from the per- sonal, and indicate the property of an indiviaaal; as, Eu-O¢, -f, -6v, mine, aoc, on, o6v, thine, Se, f, by, his, NPETEP-06, “a, -OV, our, bpeér: Ep-0¢; “a, Ov, your, opérep-0c, “a, “OV, thers, vwitep-oc, a, -ov, of us both, opwitep-oc, -a, -0v, of you both PRONOUNS. 79 3. Definite Pronoun, for the nearer and stronger distinc- tion of one object from another ; as, atréc, abrh, abd, “ he himself,” “ she herself,” “ itself.” 4. Reflexive Pronouns, for the more accurate indigation and separation of a person ; as, éuavtov, euavrTiqc, of myself, CEavToD, or OavTis, of thyself, CavTov, éavrov, or abtic, avtov, of himself. avrov, 5. Demonstrative Pronouns, which distinctly point out the object of which we are discoursing, with the accessory idea of place. These are, ovToe, avTn, TovTo, de, foe, Téde, this. éxely-0¢, -), “0, 6. Relative Pronouns, which refer to an object already mentioned, and give it a nearer definition ; as, 5c, i, é, who, SorTic, HTC, Stu, whoever. 7. Indefinite Pronouns, which merely indicate an object generally, without farther definition ; as, tig (enclitic), Ti, . Th, any, dciva, Ociva, . tTun-nsoiueba, Tur-joo.ove, TUN-HOO0LYTO. Tuirp Future, may I continue to be struck hereafter. S. rervp-oiuny, TeTinp-0L0, TETUw-0LTo, D. +. -otuebov, TetTuyp-orobor, Terup-olcOny, P. rervyp-oiueia, retinp-otobe, TETU-OLVTO. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, I may be struck. S. rén-ropat, TOn-Ty, TUNT-nTal, D. rur-ropedor, Tun-rnobov, rurr-nobor, P. run-ropeda, Ton-rTyobe, TUNT-WvT at. Perrect, I may have been struck. S. rerup-pévog © Do, D. rerup-pévo, qTOV, as P. rerup-pévot Guyer, HTe, dot. ’ First Aorist, I may have been struck. S. ru¢-06, tup-B§c, rvp-6%, D. Tug-Giroy, Tug-O7 Tov, P. rug-Gdper, tug-Oijre, Tv9g-Oa0t. Sxcoxp Aorist, I may have been struck. S. rur-d, « TUN-Fe, TuT-g, Z TUN-HTOY, TUN-7TOV, + TUT-GpED, TUR-Hre, _ « Tur-dot. Tug-Oyc0tTo, otoGry, VERB, 00 INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, rirr-codat, to be struck. Perrect, rérvg-6at, to have been struck. First Aorist, ru¢-Ojvar, to have been struck. First Furure, rv¢-Gjcec0at, to be going to be struck. Seconn Aorist, tu7-#vat, to have been struck. Seconp Fourure, tuz-jo0e00ar, to be going to be struck. Tuizp Forurs, reriy-eobat, to be going to be continually struck. PARTICIPLES. Present, being struck. N. turr-dpevoc, TunT-onévn, TunT-Opevor, G. rurr-opévov, TUNT-omevne, TUTT-opévov. Perrect, having been struck. N. rerup-pévoc, Terup-pévn, TeTup-pévoy, G. rerup-pévov, TETUL-LEVIC, TETUL-LEVOV. First Aorist, having been struck. N. rv¢-6eic, Tug-Beica, Tug-Bev, G. rvg-Bévroe, Tug-Geione, Tug-Bévrog. First Future, going to be struck. N. rug-Onoduevoc, Tig-Oncopévn, Tudg-Byobuevor, G. rug-Oycouévov, rvg-Fnoopévne, Tug-Gncouévor. Szconp Aorist, having been struck. N. rvr-ei¢, tur-eica, Tur-ey, G. run-tvrog, tur-eionc, Tun-éyTog, Sxconp Future, going to be struck. N. rur-noduevos, tur-noopévn, TUN-nOoOLevor, G. rur-noopévov, TUT-noo“evns, Tur-noouévov. Tuirp Furvure, going to be continually struck. N. rervy-duevoe, rerup-onévn, TeTuy-duevor, G. rervyp-opévov, Tervp-ouévnc, TeTvYp-ouéevov. 100 VERB. MIDDLE VOICE. The Moods and Tenses. Present, |rvmr-ouaz, Imperfect, |érumr-6uny, Perfect, rérunr-a, Pluperfect, |érervr-ecv, Ist Future,|rvy-ouac, Ist Aorist, |érep-duny, 2d Aorist, |éruz-duny, 2d Future, |rvm-otat, Numbers and Persons. The only tenses of the middle voice that differ from \ those of the active and passive of verbs in w are the first - aorists of the indicative, imperative, and optative, and the | second future of the indicative. . INDICATIVE MOOD. First Aorist, I struck myself. S. brop-duny, trinp-w, érinp-aro, D. érow-duebov, érinp-acbov, éruyp-dobyy, P. érv-dueba, Erinp-acbe, érinb-ayro Seconp Future, I shall or will strike myself. S. run-otpat, Tur-el, Tun-eira, D. rur-otpebor, tur-eiobov, vur-eiaOov, — P. rur-ovpeba, tun-eiabe, ror-otvTat. IMPERATIVE MOOD. First Aorist, strike thyself. S. riw-az, -d00u D. réyp-aobor, eae, P. rinp-acée, Tup-dobwoay, OPTATIVE MOOD. Finer Aorist, may I have struck myself. 8. rvp-aiuny, Tip-aL0, np-arro, D. runp- afuedoy, Tinp-atobor, Pecans P. ruyp-aipeba, Tby-aiobe, Tinp-alvTo. VERB. 101 PARTICIPLES. First Aorist, having struck myself. N. rop-duevoe, royp-anévn, Tup-apuévoy, G. rup-apuévou, Tup-auevnc, Tuyp-apnévov. Finest Furuse, being about to strike myself. N. ruyp-dpuevoc, Tup-ouévn, Tuy-opévoy, G. rup-ouévov, Tuyp-onévne, Tuyp-omévov. Sgconp Future, beng about to strike myself. N. rvr-ovpevoc, Tur-oupévn, TUT-ovpevoy, G. ee pevok, Tun-oupévne, ie otaives: The Greek verb, of the class in w, will now be consid- ered under the following heads : 1. AUGMENT. 2. FoRMATION OF THE TENSES. 3. Force OF THE TENSES. 4. Mippie Voice. 5. Force or tHe Moops. 1. AUGMENT. 1. The Augments are two in number, the Syllabic and Temporal. 2. The syllabic augment belongs to verbs that begin with a consonant, and is so called because it adds a sylla- ble to the verb. 3. The temporal augment belongs to verbs that begin with a vowel, and is so called because it increases the time or quantity of the initial vowel. 4. Three of the tenses have an augment, which is con- tinued through all the moods, viz., the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Third Future, or Paulo-post-futurum. 5. Three receive an augment in the indicative only, viz., the Imperfect and the two Aorists. 6. Three receive no augment, viz., the Present and the First and Second Futures. 12 102 RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 7. The true use of the augment is to mark an action which is either completely or partially past. Hence it will appear why the present and the first and second futures have no augment; why the tmperfect and two aorists have an augment only in the indicative ; and why the perfect, pluperfect, and third future, all three of which refer to a con- tinued action, have an augment continued throughout all the moods of the verb. 8. The augment originally was the same in the case of all verbs, namely, an ¢ was prefixed, whether the verb be- gan with a vowel or a consonant. ‘Traces of this old aug- ment are found in the early Ionic poets, and occasionally in Ionic prose ; as, d4pO7 for 7@0n ; Edvdave for Hvdave. 9. Afterward the usage was thus determined, that e was only prefixed to verbs beginning: with a consonant ; whereas, in others, it coalesced with the initial vowel, and became a long vowel or diphthong. Thus, rémrw has in the imperfect &-rurrov, but dyw has fyyov (from &-ayor), and ol«iSw has @xiZov (from &-olxtCov). 10. The Attics retained this old augment in the follow- ing cases: 1. In such words as fafa, édyny, éaydc, from dyw, “to break ;” to distinguish them from 7a, hya, &c., from Gyo, “I carry.” 2. In édéAwxa, &4A0; Eoixa, EoAra, £opya, in which the characteristic of the perfect middle (oc and o) could not be effaced. 3. In verbs which begin with & vowel not capable of being lengthened ; as, éH@ovy, from @béw ; Ewopuat, from the same; éwvotpny, from @véouat ; Eotpovy, from ovpéw. RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 1. The augment of the imperfect and the two aorists, in verbs beginning with a consonant, is formed by merely prefixing €; as, rurrov, Eruia, Ervrov. If, however, the verb begin with §, the # is doubled after the augment; as, Ebperrroy, from pirrw ; &ppeov, from péw. RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 1038 _ 2% The augment of the perfect is formed by repeating the Anitial consonant of the verb, and annexing to it an €; as, térvga, TétuTa; AédotTA, &c. 3. This repetition of the initial consonant is called by the grammarians Reduplication Sa aa and is sub- ject to the following rules: (A.) If the verb begins with an aspirated consonant, then in the reduplication the corresponding smooth or lents is put; as, peAéw, perfect mepiAnka ; ypv- o6w, perfect Keyptowka. (B.) If the verb begins with #, the perfect does not take the reduplication, but the f is doubled and ¢ prefixed ; as, pimrw, perfect Epprda. (C.) If the verb begin with a double consonant, ¢, é, «p, or with two consonants, the latter of which is not a liquid, the perfect does not receive the redu- plication, but only the augment ¢; as, ¢7Téw, per- fect é¢nrnxa; Evpéw, perfect éfvpHxa; pddAdw, perfect &padna; oreipw, perfect éorrapxa ; oréA- Aw, perfect Eoradxa. To this rule, however, there are the following exceptions: 1. The syncopated forms which be- gin with wr; as, wérrapat (for revérapat) ; but not so the other verbs in m7 ; as, 71repéw, énrepa- ka; 1rnoow, Exrnya. 2%. The verb xrdopaz, of which the perfect xéxrnuat is more used by the- Attics, and &xryuate by the Ionians and older At- tics. (D.) If the verb begins with a mute and liquid, the. reduplication appears in some cases, but in others is omitted. Mvdw always makes pévynua ; and verbs whose second initial consonant is p receive the reduplication regularly ; as, dpéuw, perfect de- dpéunna; Spadw, perfect réOpavea ; tpédw, per- fect rétpopa. On the other hand, it is generally 104 RULES FOR THE TEMPORAL AUGMENT. wanting in verbs whose second initial consonant is A; as, yAvrre, perfect &yAuda. 4. The augment of the pluperfect is formed by prefixing é€ to the reduplication of the perfect; as, réruda, pluperfect érerigery. 7 5. The third future passive, being formed from the per- fect of the same voice, has, like that tense, the reduplica- tion ; as, TeTinpouat. RULES FOR THE TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 1. By the contraction of the augment e with the initial vowel of the verb, the following results are obtained : a@ becomes 7; a8, dkovw, imp. fKovov. € 6c N;3 66 éyelpw, és fyyetpov. c tt; “ ixdvw, * ixavorv. ) “ @; “ dvoudsw, “ dvdpuator. v “ v; “ Bbplowo, “ wdbpicor. a “ 93 “ alpo, “ dor. av =“ qu; “ avédva, “ tisavov. ev “& qv; “ ebyopat, “ fryduny. o @; “ olkitw, “ @xicor. 2. In some verbs, however, e becomes e; as, &yo, el- xov; &dw, eldv ; Edw, eldov, &c. 3. When a verb or verbal form begins with eo, the sec- ond vowel takes the augment; as, oprdéw, éwpragoy. So, also, in the pluperfects formed from the three perfects Zoz- wa, EoAra, and Eopya, namely, égxety, éwArecy, and édp- yey. 4. Of vowels which are already long in themselves, @ becomes 7, as already mentioned ; but the others, 7, o, 2, v, are wholly incapable of being augmented ; as, #rrdéouat, imperfect #rrapny, perfect Hrrnuaz, pluperfect arrquny. REMARKS ON THE TWO AUGMENTS. 106 REMARKS ON THE TWO AUGMENTS. 1. Syllabie. 1. The ae} prefix the temporal instead of the syllabic augment to BodAoua, dbv , and péAdw; as, 2 hdvvduny, jpeddov. Here. Panag ary mgr éuéAAw, is assumed, like 0éAw and 20éAw. 2. The initial augment in the pluperfect is sometimes omitted by the Attics; as, merdvOecy for érendvOerv ; ye-. yevnuny for éyeyevquny. 3. In verbs beginning with A and p, the Ionians, Attics, and others are accustomed to put ec for Ae or pe; as, Aap- 6avw, perfect elAnda, for AéAnda; Aayxdvw, perfect el- Anya. 4. In Homer and Hesiod the second aorists often receive a reduplication ; as, xéxayov for Exayoy, from Kdéuyw ; Té- mov for ExtOov, from mref{Ow, &c. 5. The augment of the historical tenses is very often omitted in poetry by writers not Attic ; as, BdéAe for S6aAe ; Bi for &6n ; yévovro for éyévovto, &c. 2. Temporal. 1. Many verbs beginning with a diphthong neglect the augment. ‘Those in ov never take it; as, ovTdlw, ovra- Cov. ‘Those in ec also have no augment; as, elxw, elxov, ela, with the single exception of elxdgw, which is now and then augmented by the Attics; as, elxdéw, elxaca, elxaopat, Attic gxaca, Geacuat. Verbs in ev have the aug- ment 7v with the Attics, though the usage is variable. Thus we have niyouny and evyounv; evpéOny, and very rarely 1UpéOnyv. . 2. The verbs &0é0, ovéowat, and otpéw, not being sus- ceptible of the temporal augment, take e before their initial vowel or diphthong. In other words, they retain the early augment ; as, obéw, EdOovy ; wvéouat, Ewvoipny ; ovpév, Eovpovy. 3. As the syllabic augment in GovAovat, divapyat, and péddAe, is increased by the temporal, in the same manner the temporal augment in the verb dpdw is increased by the syllabic ; as, 6pdw, imperfect éspwy. 106 _ AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. 1. Verbs beginning with a vowel, not being able to take a reduplication like that in verbs with the syllabic aug— ment, have in the perfect, occasionally, what is called the Attic Reduplication. 2. The Attic reduplication is when the first two letters of the root are repeated before the temporal augment, the initial vowel remaining unchanged. Thus : dyclpw, fyyepea, Att. Red. dyiryepxa. éuéw, pexa, éufpexa. bAAvm, wAexa, as dAbAEKG. (2Ac09w) HAvOa, sé sAnavOa. 55a), ada, ss bdwda. 3. The pluperfect sometimes prefixes to this reduplica- tion a new temporal augment; most commonly in daj«xoa, qknndety. 4. A similar reduplication is formed in some verbs in the second aorist, only that here the temporal augment comes first ; as, #papov, dpopoy, ityayov. ‘AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 1. When the verb is compounded with a preposition, the augment comes between the preposition and the verb ; as. mpoopépe), Tpooepepov. 2. Verbs compounded with other words have the aug- ment usually at the beginning ; as, peAorroréw, éueAorolovy ; TrAnupEedréw, TrETANUBLEANKA. 3. Verbs compounded with ed and dv¢ take the temporal augment in the middle when these verbs commence with a vowel that admits of change; as, evepyeréw, ebnpyé- Tovyv ; dvoapectéw, Svonpsotovy. 4. But when these particles are joined to verbs com- mencing with an immutable vowel or a consonant, they REMARKS ON THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 107 take the ‘augment at the beginning; as, dvownéw, édvod- movy ; dvoTuyéw, edvoriynoa ; ebdoxinéw, nbdoxipovy. In compounds with ev, however, the augment in such ca- ses is commonly omitted ; as, evwyéouat, evwyovpny, &c. REMARKS ON THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 1. The prepositions, excepting 7repl, lose their final vowel before the syllabic augment ; as, drrédwxe, dudébad- Aev ; but mepréOnxa, not mepéGnxa. In the case of rpo, however, the o is usually contracted with €; as, mpov6n, apov0nka, &c. 2. The prepositions ovv and éy, whose final consonant is changed by the laws of euphony into y, A, p, p, 6, re- sume v before the syllabic augment; as, éyy/yvouat, éve- ytyvouny ; ovAdéyo, ovvédeyor ; éupéva, evévevor, &c. 3. Strictly speaking, all those verbs have the augment at the beginning which are not so much themselves com- pounded with another word as derived from a compound one. Thus, devorabéw, edervordbovy, from decvorrabhe ; olxodovéw, @koddpuovy, from olxodduoc, é&c. 4. Hence some verbs, apparently compounded with prep- ositions, take the augment at the beginning; as, évayriov- pat, Avavrovuny, from évavtioc. So, also, dvri60Aw, hv- TLbdAovy. 5. Exceptions, however, to the rules just mentioned, are of no unfrequent occurrence, especially among the Attics, with whom we find the following forms: é&exAnjolacay, évexwulacoyv, mpoepnrevoa, ériterndevaa, &c., although in all these verbs no simple form exists, but they are derived at once from éxxAnoia, éyxapuov, mpod7nrns, Enitndhe. 6. Some compound verhs take a double augment, name- ly, one befure and one after the preposition ; as, dvop06u, HhvdpOovy, exnvapOwrar ; EvoxAsw, HvOxAovy ; dvéxo, fv- exouny ; Trapovéw, érap@vnoev, &c. Still more irregular are the following: dedtgyrnxa, éSedediqrnro, from dratdw ; dedtaxnxa, éd:@xnoa, from drovxéw ; and, in later writers, qvhawea, from dvadtoxw, and dedinxévnxa, from daxovéw. 106 FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. 2. FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. The Imperfect is formed from the present by changing the termination w into ov, and prefixing the augment; as, Témrw, Erurrroyr ; yw, Edeyov ; dyw, tryov. The First Future is formed from the present by changing the last syllable in the First conjugation into pw; as, TUTTW, Tipw; Second conjugation “ fw; “ Aéyw, Absa; Third conjugation “ ow; “ tlw, tlow; and in the fourth conjugation by circumflexing the last syllable, and shortening the penult; as, péAAw, paaAd. Verbs in dw and éw generally change a and ¢ into 7, and verbs in 6w change o into w; as, Tidw, Tishow; gidéw, gtAnjow ; dnAdw, dnAwow. Four verbs, commencing with a smooth syllable, change that smooth into an aspirate in the future ; as, EXO, Ew. tpéxa, dpétw. TpEPL, Dpépo. TOPO, Dinpa.! The First Aorist is formed from the first future by prefixing the augment and changing w into a; as, Tio, Ervipa. 1. These apparent anomalies admit of a very easy explanation. The old form of yw was Eyw, which was changed to Eyw, because two suc- cessive syllables cannot well have each an aspiration. But in the future the He reappears, in consequence of the 7 being removed, in order to make way for the termination of the future, f. In like manner, the old presents of rpégw, tpéxyw, and Tv¢gw were respectively Dpépu, Spéxa, and Didu, erg to rpé¢w, &c., in order that two successive syllables might not each begin with an aspirate ; while in the future the first as- pirate reappears, the latter having been changed. FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. 109 In verbs of the fourth conjugation, namely, those ending Am Aw, pw, VW, pw, the short vowel of the penult is again mmade long by changing into 7; as, pddAdw, padd, Ebnia. “ rate from beginning two muccesaise syllable 2 “( 180 ¥RRR. ACTIVE VOICE. Moods and Tenses. Present, Imperfect, sorny 2d Aorist, EOny, Dé, | Selnv, | Od, | Deivas, | Deic, Edu, dé, doiny, dG, dotvat, dove. The other tenses are regularly formed from verbs in w Thus : ist Future, ist Aorist, &derEa, réOetx-a, Perfect, déduwx-a, dédety-a, Pluperfect. éarpxecy or eiaraxecy, Erefeixery, Ededdxeey, Ededetverv. Numbers and Persons, PRESENT. Si rT. Dual. Plural. tor “nt, 8 N¢, Ol, arov, arov, duev, are, Got, aS M, NOt, eTov, = EFOY, quev, ere, eiat, id-wtt, Wl, wot, oroy, aroy, °, ore, ofet, Oeixy-vut, Us, vel. irov, vrov. ay, ure, dou. Singular. tor-ny, 1, éri-nv, 1s, 0; édid-wv, wl, o, édcixy-uy, ve, v, Singular. Eor-17v, mS, 1s 86-nv, NS, =, 5 OO, a, Singular. lerat-an, Tibei-ny, No, 2 dudoi-77, Singular. orai-ny, Cei-7v, dol-nv 1S; , VERB. 151 IMPERFECT. Dual. Plural. drov, arny, duey, are, acav, eTor, érny, euey, ee, ecar, oTov, érny, ouev, oT, ooay, trop, orny, ®uev, wre, soar. Seconp Aorist. Dual. Plural. TOV, NTNY, HEV, Te, NOar, eTor, érnqy, eueV, eT, e0ay, | oToy, érny, | Oouev, OTe, ocay. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Dual. Plural. Tov, TOY, Te, TWOaP. Ssconp Aorist. Dual. Plural. OTHTOV, OTHTUY, oTire, 9 Gérov, Oérur, Gére, Oérwoayr, dérov, ddrwy, d6re, dérwcay. OPTATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. ’ Dual. Plural. | nro, fray | yer, mre, ae end Seconp Aorist, Dual. Plural. | TOV, GTN, | bie a ond 152 ‘WER. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PrREseEnr. Singular. Dual, Plural. HTov, fiTov, Guev, FTE, GOl, HTOv, WTO, OTov, @To?V, Seconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. OTO, OTH, OTF, OTHTOV, OTHTOY, OTAUEV, OTHTE, OTUCl, 64, 5, 63, OjTov, Ojrov, LEV, Gjre, G01, », dg, dd, ‘d6rov, ddrov, dipev, OGTe, dddt. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. lordvaz. riBévat. o.dbvat. Cecxvivat. Sgconp Aorist. orjvar. ' Seivat. dodvat. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. Szoonp Aorist. lor-de, doa, ay, ord, ordca, ordy, Tt0-ei¢, eica, éy, Veic, Veioa, Gév, 616-ov¢, ovca, év, dove, dovca, dv. Oecxy-tc, toa, by. PASSIVE VOICE. The Moods and Tenses. lor-apuat, Ti0-euat, Present, did-ouat, deixy-vuat, lorduny, ériOéuny, Imperfect, bdr Bd si édeckvvuny, VERB, 158 Tenses formed from Verbs in w. -ainny, |~iuas,| -do0at, -ciuny, |-cyuwat,| -eiafar, Eot-quat, | * Perfect, Tég-eipai, déd-omat, -bcfac, déd-eryyat, -el Hat, éorduny, Eredeiuny hic coe ee : Plup., Medéury, The rest like the perfect. | Edededyuqy, éorud-opat, . j-oiuyy,| . . | -eobae ~Oyev oc 3d Fut. refleio-opa, t oly, : -e08 -uevoc, dedoo-omat, +» Polen) . -eobat, ~Gpevor éorabyy, \orab-yrs,| -einv,| -G, | var, -cic, lst A Erétay, Té-qTt, | -einv,| -d, -Hvdl, -eic, By 2t0t bd6Onv, |dd0-nrt, | -einv,| -0, | -qvat, -eic, Edeixfyy, ; decyf-jvai,| -eirc. -eobat, Ist Fut Numbers and Persons. INDICATIVE MOOD. PREsENT. Singular. Dual. Plural. tora- a tra cat, rat,| pebov, oOov, cbov, peOa, ofe, vrat, Ocixyv- Iuperrect. Singular Dual. Plural. lord- i inv, oo, ro, | pebov, obov, by, | peGa, ofe, To, édecavv- IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Singular. _ Dual. Plural. lord- pate go, 0a, oOo, obur, ! obe, cOwcay. éeixvv- 154 VERB. OPTATIVE MOOD. PresEnr. Stngular. Dual. Plural. lorai- piel tm, 0, | pedov, obov, obny, | peba, o6e, To, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Dual. Plural. lor-cpas, %, gra, cpebov, jobov, 7o8ov, | ayueba, jobe, Gvrat, rO0-Guat, 9 grat, , Ho8ov, Hobov, | Gueba, jobe, Gvras bid-cuat, 6, rai, | duebor, Gobor, Sobor, | cela, Gobe, Gvrat. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PREsENT. Present. _ . toracbat, lorduev-oc, rideoOat, TOéuev-of, didoobat, didduev-og, Br OM. deixvvobat. decxyvuev-oc, MIDDLE VOICE. The Moods and Tenses. The present and imperfect are the same as in the pas- sive. The Second Aorist. Indic. Imp. Opt. éorauny, | ordoo, oTaiuny, &6éuny, Véao, Veiunr, édounr, | ddc0, doiuny, Infin. Part. orduat, | ordoba, | orduevor, Vauar, | Béobar, | Séuevos, dapat, doobat, | ddpuevoc. Tenses formed from Verbs in w. bornoduny, i ha peak Baa -acbat, ~GLEvOS, : bOnkauny, 6 ee Pee Ast Aorist, bboxauny, édecguuny, deif-ae, -aiuqy, : wpa, -asbat, ~auevog. OTHO-o1at, ar ae Ist ra sa son -co8at, | ~Guevog. dcig-opat, A VERB. 155 Numbers and Persons. INDICATIVE MOOD. Sgeconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. éord- i em oo, To, | pefov, cbov, cOyv, | peba, fe, vro. On IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sgconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. orTd- pia 90, ofa, ofov, obur, obe, ofwoay.- OPTATIVE MOOD. Srconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Srconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. oT-Guat, ¥, Frat, | duelov, Fobov, FoOov, | Guefa, Goble, Gvrat, V-ouat, ¥, yrat, | ouedov, Holov, jo8ov, | Oueba, jobe, Gvrat, d-Guat, 9, Gat, | Guebov, Sobov, Gobor, | Ouea, Goble, Svrat. INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLE. Sgeconp Aorist. Seconp Aorist. ores, | ord- éo8at 8é- evoc, pévy, pevor. déc8at. é6- aia 156 REMARKS ON VERBS. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. ACTIVE VOICE. The Imperfect is formed from the present by prefixing the augment and changing ju into y ; as, TOnyt, EriOnv. The Second Aorist is formed from the imperfect by dropping the reduplication ; as, ér(Onv, €6nv ; or by changing the improper reduplication into the augment; as, lorqy, Eorny. PASSIVE VOICE. The Present is formed from the present active by shortening the penult and changing pe into pac; as, lornuc, lordpac. The Imperfect is formed from the present by prefixing the augment and changing pas into yyy ; as, TiBeyar, ErvOéuny. MIDDLE VOICE. The Second Aorist is formed from the imperfect by dropping the reduplication ; as, ériOéuny, &0éunv ; lorduny, sorduny. REMARKS ON VERBS IN pt. 1. The number of verbs in yz, in the Attic and common dialects, is very small, and among these few are only four which have a complete conjugation peculiar to themselves, namely, TéOqut, int, lornut, and didwyt. 2. ‘These verbs were chiefly used in the Molo-Doric dialect; and in the writers of that dialect verbs very fre- quently occur in the form yz, which in other dialects termi- nate in dw, éw ; as, vixnut, pdpnut, for vixdw, mopéw. 3. These forms in pt are to be regarded as among the REMARKS ON VERBS. 157 oldest in the language, and occur frequently in the poems of Homer and Hesiod. After the dialects arese, the Ionic and Attic retained some of these verbs, namely, those above given (§ 1) and those in vyt, instead of which they very seldom use the forms in tw. The Molic, however, which retajned the most of the ancient language, continued to use the greater part of them. 4, Historically considered, then, the verb in we must have been at least as old as those in w, and of more extensive use than appears in the works which have come down to us. 5. The first aorists in xa, of verbs in pt, are thought to have been originally perfects, and to have been subsequent- ly used as aorists, when a peculiar form was introduced for the perfect. ; 6. The aorists in xa have not the rest of the moods after the indicative ; and, therefore, in giving the moods and tenses, we cannot say €6nKa, OjKov, Onxarut, &c., but must pass to the second aorist; as, €0nka, Yéc, Veiny, &c. 7. In Ionic and Doric the forms éw, dw, 6w, often occur in the present and imperfect singular, with the reduplication ; as, TLOsic, EmiTiOeic, didoic, &didove, &c. 8. In the third person plural the form doz is used by the Attics, which occurs also frequently in Ionic, and hence is called Ionic ; as, teOédor, didddot, &c. 9. The first aorist in xa occurs in good writers almost exclusively in the singular and in the third person plural. In the rest of the persons the second aorist is more used, which, again, hardly ever occurs in the singular. 10. The optative present and second aorist, as in the aorist passive of verbs in @, have in the plural, in the poets as well as prose writers, more commonly eipey, etre, Fieyv ; aivey, aire, aiev; olpev, oie, oev; instead of elev, einre, &c. 11. In the verb fornuz, the perfect, pluperfect, and sec- ond aorist have an intransitive meaning, “ to stand ;” the rest of the tenses a transitive one, “ to place.” Thus, &o- tnka signifies “ I stand ;” elorjxeyv, “I was standing.” But éorny, “ I stood,” as a transient action. 12. The form Zordxa, which is found in the common ~ grammars, occurs in later writers only, and in a transitive sense, “ I have placed.” ‘The Doric form éo7Gxa, with the long penult, is distinct from as 5 IRREGULAR OK wo. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS IN pet ay be divided into three classes, each containing three erbs. I. From & are derived elué, to be ; ewe and Inut, to go. II. From & are derived inut, to send ; juat, to sit; eiuat, to clothe one’s self. II. Ketuac, to lie down ; lonut, to know; pnt, to say. CLASS I. 1. Elué, to be, has been before conjugated, as it is used in some of its tenses as an uuziliary to the passive voice of verbs in w. 2. Eluz, to go. INDICATIVE MOOD, . Lead . ParesEnr. Singular. Dual. Plural, elut, el¢ or el, elas. irov, troy. fuer, he) elot, low ox ImPERFECT. fev, he, ge. | helrov, eirnrv. | hemev, here, fecoav. Furvure, elow. First Aorist, eloa. PERFECT, eixa. PLUpEeRFEcT. elx-eiv, ets, et. =| etrov, eityv. | elev, etre, evoay. Szconp Aorist. lov, leo, te | lerov, lérny. | louev, cere, for. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. te orel, iro. | frov, rar. ] fre, lroca» Srconp Aorist. le, léro. | lerov, lérov. | ere, léracay IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 159 OPTATIVE MOOD. Sgconp Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. Foust, lou, tor. | lorrov, idiryv. | louev, torre, orev. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Seconp Aorist. lo, Ine, ty, | Inrov, tnrov. | Zapev, Iyre, lwor. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. Seconp Aorist. levat. | lov, lotoa, lér. REMARKS. 1. The Attics regularly use the present tense of ele in a future sense, “J will go.” ‘This usage occurs also in Jonic. ‘The form efooac occurs in Attic only as the future of olda. 2. The form ef is more used in Attic than elc. Homer has also elada, Il. 10, 450, &c. 3. In the imperative, the form 2: is more used than el. For (twoay we have occasionally, in Attic, irwv. 4. The imperfect #evy is nothing more than the form ely with 7 as a prefix, analogous to which are the forms 7eé- dey and 7jiov. ‘The form 7ia, Attic ga, also occurs, and is erroneously regarded by some as the perfect middle, just as 7elv is sometimes miscalled the pluperfect middle. ‘The best grammarians regard 7jia as merely an Ionic form for, qevv ; just as in TiOnuc, the Tonic érf@ea is the same as EriOny ; and in elué, £ am, the lonic ja is the same as 77. 5. The form ga never has the signification of the perfect, and 7jecy never that of the pluperfect ; but both forms agree in this respect, and designate generally a time past, either absolutely, or with reference to another time ; that is, they stand for the aorist and imperfect. 6. From what has been said respecting 7jecy, it will be seen at once how erroneous it is to subscribe the ¢ under the 7. ‘This mistake arose from the tense in question being regarded as a pluperfect, and deduced from qa. In 160 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. qa the subscript ¢ is correct, since this form is contracted from fia. 7. We have called lw» the second aorist participle, since it follows the analogy of the aorist participle in hav- ing the accent on the ending. Others make it a present participle. 3. "Int, to go. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Singular. Dual. Plural. Enut, inc, ltyot | erov, lerov. | Yeuer, tere, leioe. ImpPeRFECT. —- leoay. OPTATIVE MOOD. PreEsENr. lein. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. PRusknr. lévar. | leic, lévrog. MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PREsENT. Singular. Dual. Plural. le-ual, oat, tat. | pefov, cOov, cbov. | peba, ofe, vrat. IMPERFECT. lé-unv, oo, To. | pebov, ofov, cOyv. | peba, ofe, to. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. PRESENT. feao, téobu. | iéuev-o¢, 9, Ov. INFINITIVE. lecOat. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE YERBS. 161 CLASS II. 1. "Int, to send. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Singular. Dual. Plural. input, inc, tno. | lerov, leroy. | leuev, tere, leios. ImPEeRFEct. inv, inc, &. | terov, lernv. | Zeuev, tere, tleoay. First Fourure. ffo-w, ele, et. | ero, eTov. | oev, ere, over. First Aorist. Perrect. PLupEeRFEcr. 7kQ. | elxa. | elxety. Szconp Aorist. yy, TS, | —‘Erov, Ernv. | 8uev, Ere, cay. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PREs@nrT. le6t, bérw. | erov, sérav. | lére, létaoar. Seconp Aorist. a, Era. | Erov, Etwr. | &e, Erucar. OPTATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. bei-nv, 1% 1%. | tov, rnv. | guev, gre, goar. First Furvre. Prerrect. fooupe. | elxouit. Sreconp Aorist. env, 1% =. | tov, grav. | gqpev, gre, goar. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. id, ie, = Ssrov, $= ro. | Mepen, Ure, loon 02 162 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. Perrgcr. Singular. Dual. Plural. x-02, YS Yeo | Tov, Tov. | pev, Te, oot. Sgeconp Aogist. I, 2. | arov, TOV. [ Guev, Fre, der INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. First Furvrr. lévat. | foety. PEeRrect. : Srconp Aorist. elxévat. | elvas. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. First Forore. leis, _—ibleioa, lév. | fiowv, foovca, Foov. Perrecr. Seconp Aorist. elxdc, elxvia, elxéc. | ele, eloa, Ey, PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PreseEnrt, Singular. Dual. Plural. le-uar, oat, tat. | pebov, obov, ofov. | pela, ofe, vrat. IMPERFECT. lé-unv, 90, To. | peGov, cfov, cOnv. | eOa, ofc, vro. PerRFecr. el-uat, cat, rat. | pelov, aBov, ofov. | peba, ofe, vrat. PLurerrecr. ef-unv, 00, To. | pefov, ofor, obyv. | peGa, ofe, vro. P. P. Fourvurg. First Aorist. ‘First Fourvre. elgquat | yvand clay. | EGjoopaL, IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. $168 MIDDLE VOICE. Present and imperfect like the Passive." First Aorist. Singular. Dual. Plural. §x-duyv, , aro. | duefov, acbov, doOqv.| dueba, aofe, avro. First Foroxe. fo-oeat, ei, erat. | Ouefov, ecfov, eobov.| dueOa, eode, ovras. Srconp Aorist. . buy, Eco, Ero. | EueBov, Eobov, Ecbyv. | Euefa, Eobe, Evro. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PerFeEct. eloo, — eladu. | elobov, elofwrv. | tobe, elofwcay. Seconp Aorist. &co and ov, ow. -| Ecobor, Eobuv. | &8o0e, Ecbwoar. OPTATIVE MOOD. First Forore. hool-unv, 0, To. | peGov, abov, cbyv. | peba, abe, vo. Sreconp Aorist. el-u7y, o, 70. | peBov, cbov, cOyv. | peba, cOe, ro. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. | Seconp Aorist. Guar, $F, grat. | duchov, Fobov, Fofov.| Syebq, ode, dvras. INFINITIVE MOOD. First Furure. Seconp Aorist. froeobat. |. Eobat. PARTICIPLES. Firet Forure. Sgeconp Aorist. Hodpev-oc, N; ov. | Euev-oc, Ms ov. 1. The middle form tear is used in the sense of “to hasten ;” lit- erally, ‘to send one’s self on.” Hence arises the kindred meaning of “to desire ;” i. e., to send one’s self after anything, in which sense it is the root of iepo¢, ‘“‘ destre.” IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERRBS. 2. "Hyat, to sit.' , INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Dual. | Plural. 1, oat, rat. | fuebor, fofor, Faber. | FueGa, dobe, Fvras! ImrEeRFEct. my, oo, ro. | huebov, jodor, fotny.| fpeba, jobe, §vro. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PresEnrt. $0, ho8u. | $o8ov, fobur. | ole, fobwcar. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PresEnr. : Present. yoGat. | huevo, 9, ove 8. Elpaz, to clothe one’s self. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Dual. Plural. eluat, eloac, elrac, and | boteees | — elyras. elorat. PLUPERFECT. eluny, elco, and Ecco, To, elaro, Eegro, and =o — lyre. &oro. First Aorist. tia- éoo- eum, @, G@To. set, aobov, dobry. | éuefa, acbe, ayro, éeco- 1. This verb is considered, by many grammarians, as a perfect sive from &u, I set, being for ef ae sleds &c. The scone und pada is more common than the simple verb. . 2. For #vrac the Ionians used fara:, and for 7vro, in the pluperfect, &aro; for which the poets said elaraz and elaro. 3. The accent is on the antepenult, on account of the present signifi- cation. The true accentuation, if juevog be regarded as a perfect par- ¢ rd e ticiple, is on the penult, yuévor IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 168 PARTICIPLES. Present anp Perrecr. Finst Aorisr. eluevoc. | éaaduevor. CLASS III. 1. Ketpas, to lie down. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Stngular. Dual. Plural. kef-uat, cat, Tat.| pefov, ofov, cOov. | peba, ocbe, vrat. IMPERFECT. bxei-unv, oo, to. | pedov, obov, oOyv. | peba, be, yro. First Furvre. keio-ouat, et, erat. | dueGov, eofov, ecov. | duela, eobe, ovras. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. xeioo, xetofw. | xKeicbov, xeloduy. | keiobe, xelobwoar. OPTATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. weol-uqv, 0, To. | pebov, ofov, cbyv. | yeOa, be, vT0 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. First Aogisr. wopac. | Keiowpuat. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PREsENT. PRESENT. wetoOat. | keimev-oc, MN ov. 166 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 2. "Ionut, to know.' INDICATIVE MOOD. Parsenr. Singular. Dual. Plural. lo-nut, 6, et. | atov, § aroyv. | gay and ag , aa! ImPERFECT. : auev, ate, acay, and lo-nv, = _"¢ 2. | arov, arTnv. | es IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. lo-aft and 6c, drw and | arov and rov, drwy | are and re, drwoar, TW. and Twr. Twoay, and Tw. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. PRESENT. ladyas. } isa-, oa, * : MIDDLE VOICE: INDICATIVE MOOD. PreEsENT. Singular. Dual. Plural. loa-uat, cat, rat. | pebov, obov, ofov. | pefa, ocbe, vrat. ImPERFEcT. lod-unv, co, To. | pebov, cflov, ofyv. | pela, cfs, vra INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. PRESENT. lcacfat. | boduev-o¢, 9, ov. 1. The verb Zonue occurs in the singular only in Doric writers; as, loaut, Theocrit. 5,119. According to the grammarians, oldayev, the first person plural of olda, was changed by the Ionic writers into Zduey, which the Attics softened into louev, from this last was formed a new present, namely, the verb loz. 2. In common use, the dual and plural of the present tense alone oc- cur. For the singular olda is employed. Thus, olda, ola@a, olde; dual, lorov, torov ; plural, lover, lore, ioact. 3. The passive Zoauaz is not in use. / IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 167 3. Onl, to say. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Dual. Plural. out, gic, gnoi. | garév, gardv. | gapév, part, gaot. IMPERFECT. &4-7, 19>. 7). arov, arny. Gpev, pe, aoay, and First Fotvure. ¢70-0, eu, e. | erov, eTov. | omer, ere, ovo First Aorist. bgno-a, ac, e. | ator, arny. | quev, are, av. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PResENnt. ¢cht, géro. | ¢drov, gdtrav. | ddre, gétwoar. OPTATIVE MOOD. PREseENT. gai-ny, 1% 7 qtov, Tn. ja, te First Aorist. ¢ho-ayu, at, at. | atrov, airny. | amev, aire, aver. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. 90, di, 99. | $iror, gitov. | gapev, gre, gdct. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. Present. pavat. l gas, paca, ody. Finst Aorist. First Furvgs. $ijoat. | gow. 168 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. - Szconp Aorist. Frest Aontsr. givat. | | $7008. PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. negaobat, | wegaopév-oc, 9, ow. MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PREskExr. Stagular. Dual. Plural. ga-pal, cai, rai. | pefov, cov, cBov. | peba, ocOe, vras. IMPERFECT. bgd-uyv, co, To. | pebov, ofov, ofjv. | peOa, ofe, vre. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. ¢dc-0, A. | Bov, Buy. [| 6c, Oacav. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. PRESENT. ¢aobat. | GauEV-0C, OMe REMARKS. 1. The present indicative of @nui, with the exception of the second person singular, is enclitic ; i. e., throws back its accent upon the preceding word. 2. The imperfect é@7v, &c., is generally placed after one or more words of the speaker, as an aorist, like the Latin inguté, even when another word of the same signifi- cation precedes. “Egy, oa, and the infinitive dda, are always used of past time ; as, ddvar Tov Lwxpdrn, “ that Socrates has said.” 3. In the language of common life 777, 7j¢, 7, is frequently DEFECTIVE VERBS. 169 for pnw, bone, En. Thus, 4 0° &¢, “ said he ;” Fv & a, “ sad I.” 4. The aorist pnoa is hardly used in the Attic dialect, except in the sense of “to maintain ;” as, dnépnoe, “ she refused ;” Xen, Cyrop. 6, 1, 82. The optative djoayu and subjunctive ¢7ow often occur in this same sense. DEFECTIVE VERBS.! 1. From irregular verbs must be distinguished the de- fectives, of which a considerable number occur m the Greek language. ‘These exhibit no deviation in the formation of tenses, like the irregular verbs, but are characterized by the following peculiarities : 2. From the great copiousness of the Greek language ; from the diversity of its dialects, of which several attained a high cultivation, and were established in written produc- tions ; and from the particular attention continually bestowed, by the Greeks in general, upon the harmony and improve- ment of their language, it could not fail to happen that a multitude of old forms gradually declined in use, and were, at length, entirely supplanted by others of more modern date. Thus the simplest form, the present of many verbs, has become obsolete, and is no longer to be met with m the writings of the Greeks ; while individual forms, chiefly for the narrative tense, the aorist, are still in use. 3. Every such relic of an old verb is now associated with the more modern present form to which it belongs m signification, although the two frequently possess no resem- blance to each other. Thus we say, that to the present aipéw belongs the aorist elAov, although it is impossible far the latter form to be deduced in any way from the former, but the two are allied together solely by the common sig- nification, “to take away.” The same is the case with re- spect to detcouar and #AGov, both being associated with 170 CATALOGUE OF the present Epyouac, and to others enumerated in the fol- lowing catalogue. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. Observations. 1. The forms distinguished by capitals are all obsolete roots, which are requisite for the deduction of irregular forms still in use, but must no longer be used themselves. 2. To avoid unnecessary prolixity, the extant forms of an irregular verb are often not completely enumerated. These, however, are merely forms which continue in the analogy, and can be formed easily and regularly, and the omission is always indicated by &c. Thus, for example, in alvéw, after assigning the future alvéow, the aorist 7veoa can be formed at once, and, therefore, has not been received into the catalogue. 3. Where the signification is not specifically given, the natural one, such as is clear from the signification of the present, must be understood to remain. 4. Forms which are usual only with the poets and in the older language are designated by an * at the begin- ning. A. Adu, “I hurt,’ of which the aorist daca or doa, in the active; darat, the third person singular of the present ; ddo67v, in the passive aorist, and dacdu7y, in the middle aorist, are alone used. ’Ayeipw, “I assemble,” future, dyepd, perfect, #yepxa, both regular. The pluperfect, with the Attic reduplication, éy7yepxa; third person pluperfect passive, *dy7ryéparo ; third person plural, second aorist mid- dle, *7yepovro, besides its participle *dypduevog. "Ayapat, ‘‘I admire,” present and imperfect like torauac; futtre, éydcouas ; first aorist passive, 7yao07y ; first aorist middle, 7yacdunv. "Ayvuut, “I break,” from “ATQ, future, dw ; first aorist, fafa (with the old form of the augment), in the epic dialect also #£a ; perfect mid- dle, éya (with an intransitive signification, “I am broken”); second aorist passive, éay7v. "Ayv, “I lead,” future, dfw, &c.; second sorist, 7yayov ; infinitive IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171 ‘Of the second aorist, dyayeiv ; second aorist middle, 7yayéur7v (all these three with the Attic reduplication) ; perfect, #ya, Doric dynjoya. *Acipa, “I raise up,” used only in the participle, deipwy ; participle passive, Ge:pduevoc ; participle of the first aorist active, deipac; of the first aorist middle, decpduevoc ; of the first aorist passive, depOeic; and in the third person singular of the first aorist passive, dép67; the third person plural of the same tense, depOev ; the third person singular of the pluperfect passive, Gwpro. All its remaining forms are deduced from alpu. *AEQ, infinitive, d7vaz or dqpuévat, “to blow,” retains the long char- acteristic vowel also in the dual and plural, as well as in the passive. Present passive, dqjuat; first aorist active, deoa; first aorist infinitive active, décaz, “to sleep.” - Alyéw, “ I praise,” future, alvéow, &c. ; perfect passive, Fynuat; but aorist passive, Zvébyv. Aipéw, “I take,” future, alpjow; perfect, fonxa, Ionic, apaipnxa ; perfect passive, fonaz ; first aorist passive, 7pé0yv. The second aorist is borrowed from the obsolete root ‘EAQ, and makes eiAoy, infinitive éAciv, for the active ; and elAdunv, infinitive éAéo@ac, for the middle. Alp, “I rate,” future, apd, &c. _ AloGdvopat, “TI feel,” future, aloOyoopat, &c.; second aorist, fo66- pny ; perfect, goOnyat. *Axaypévoc, “ pointed,” perfect participle passive, from an unusual root, which may be ’AKAZQ or ’AKQ, ies as a reduplication is assumed or not in dxaypévoc. PAKAXQ, “TI afflict,” second pee qxaxov ; first aorist, Fxdynoa or dxéynoa; second aorist middle, 7xaydunv or axaxdunv ; perfect passive, dxdynuac and axyjyeuat; third person plural perfect passive, d&xnxédarat for dxnxevrat ; third person plural pluperfect passive, Gxay- eiaro for axdynvrTo. * AAeeive, “ I avoid,’’ to which the epic forms of the first sorist-mid- dle are, 7Aevaro or dAevaro ; participle, dAevduevoe ; infinitive, dAéac- @az and GAevaocGar, deduced from a root ’AAE without o. *ArXéEw, “I avert,” future, dAeEyow ; and, from ’AAEKQ, the first ao- rist middle infinitive, dAéEacOat. From the syncopated form ’AAKQ, and by reduplication, are formed the epic second aorist infinitive, 6AaA- xeiv, &c. "ANaivu, “ I heal,” fature, 4AGjow ; second aorist middle, *4A66u79, with an intransitive signification. ‘AXioxouat, Iam caught,” from ‘AAOQ, future, dAdcopa:; second aorist active (with a passive signification, “ I was caught”), fAwy, Attic édAwy ; second aorist infinitive, dAGvac; second sorist subjunctive, did, ~ 172 CATALOGUE OF dAgec, &e.; second aorist optative, dAofgy ; participle of second aorist, dAote ; perfect, fiwaa, Attic ééAuxa (in a passive signification, “ Z have been caught’’). * AAraive, * I sin,” fatare, GAirgou ; sécond aorist, #A:roy ; second sorist middle, #Actéeyv. Also GAcrHuevor, as present participle middle, from an accessory form, GAirque. *AAAouat, “ I spring,” future, dAotpa: ; fixet aorist, #Aduqyv ; second aorist middle, 7Adu1v ; epic, in the second and third persons, syncopated and without aspiration, dAco, dAro. *AAvoxu, “I skun,” future, GAdgw ; first aorist, fAvea. ‘Apapravu, “ Terr,” fatare, duapriooua: ; perfect, iudpryxa; second sorist, fuaprov, epic 7ubporov. "Aubdiokw, ‘* I miscarry,” future, 6ubAdou, &c., from ’AMBAOQ. "Aurézo and duxicyvotuat, see under “Exo. *AundAaxioxw, “ I err’ or “ miss,” future, duxAaxgow ; second a0- rist, #unAaxoy ; second aocrist infinitive, durAaxeiv. *Augeévvngt, “ I dress,” "AM@IEQ, future, dugcéow, Attic, duped ; first aorist, Zupicoa ; perfect passive, Hugieouat, Gugcetat. ’Avadioxw, “I consume” or “ spend,” forms from évaAdw the future, évaAdow ; first aorist, dvddAwoa; perfect, dvdAwxa, both unangmented with the Attics; but in Ionic with the augment 9ydAaxa or év7Awxa. ‘Avddve, “ I please,” imperfect, fvdavoy, and édvdavor epic, also d7v- éavov ; second aorist, Eddov epic, and also ddov, besides the third per- son, ebdde ; second aorist infinitive, ddeiv ; perfect, fada and 8ada ; fu- ture, ddzow. *Avjvobev, third person singular of the perfect middle, to denote a finished action, “‘ gushes forth,” “rises up ;”’ to be derived from ’ANOQ, allied to dvOéw, “ I flower.” ’Avoiyw or dvoiyvupt,.see Oiye. *Avwya, an old perfect form of uncertain derivation, and with a pres- enf meaning, ‘‘ I command” or “‘ commission.” First person plural in a syncopated form, Gvwyyev ; imperative, dvwyxh, besides fvdyea as a plu- perfect. Hence a new present, dvdyw ; imperfect, #ywyov and gvdyeop ; future, dvofw ; first aorist, 7vwéa. *Arnvpwy, as first person singular and third person plural of the im- perfect, with also an aorist signification, “‘ I took away ;” second person, arntpag ; third person, dr7pa, from an assumed radical form, éravpda, of which, however, nothing occurs besides the forms just enumerated. To it drrovpac belongs as a participle, although their connexion does not admit of being clearly pointed out. WAnxagioxy, “ I deceive,” second aorist, 7ragoy ; second aorist infin- itive, dragety ; future, dxagqou. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 173 "AnexGavouat, “Iam hated,” future, dwexOgoonas ; perfect, dr7xOy- poas ; second aorist, drnzOduny. *Apapioxw, “ I fit,” second aorist, Zpapov ; future, Gpow ; first aorist, Hpoa ; first aorist middle, 7pedunv. The perfect middle, dpdpa or dpypa, has an intransitive signification, as also the perfect passive, dpjpeuac. *Aptoxu, ‘‘ I make favourable” or “ pleasing,” also intransitive “ J please,” future, dpéow, dc. ; perfect passive, fpeouat ; first aorist pase sive, 7péoOny. "APQ, radical form to dpapicxe and dpéoxw ; also to alpu. Avidva, ‘I increase,” second aorist, yigov ; future, av&jou ; first aorist, 7v&yxa; perfect passive, 7vénuac; first aorist passive, 70f/O7v ; first future middle, adéjoouar, as future passive, “ I shall grow,” i. e., be increased. "AxGonar, “ I am vexed,” future, GyOécouar ; first aorist passive, #x- Géc6ns. *AXQ, radical form to dyvupar and ’AKAXQ. B. Baiva, “ I go,” primitive form BAQ, by reduplication BrBdw, Biénut, or, by the insertion of ox, Bdoxw ; future, Bjoopac; perfect, Bé6nxa ; second aorist, &6yv ; second aorist subjunctive, 84; second aorist op- tative, Bainy ; imperative, ($70c; infinitive, Pivac; participle, Bde. Some compounds take a transitive signification, and therefore form also the passive forms, perfect, Bé6auaz; first aorist, t6a67v. In the Tonic dialect the simple verb is also used in the transitive sense, “ to lead,” “to bring,” and the future Byow and first aonst &670a stand ex- clusively in this signification. The following accessory forms, from the dialects, must also be observed. 1. Of the third person present, 6:6d, participle, Bc6v, formed from Bi6dw, and Bibd¢ from Bibnus. 2. Of the second aorist, third person dual, Baryy, besides Bary ; third person plural, &6av, besides é6jcav ; subjunctive, Bd, lengthened into 6é and - 6eiv, plural, Betouev. 3. The syncopated accessory forms of the perfect, first person plural, Gé6ayev, third person plural, Be6dacc ; third person plural of the pluperfect, Bé6acay ; participle of the perfect, Bebauc, Beb- avia, contracted Bebdc, Bebdea, &c. All these forms belong to the poets, and particularly to the epic poets, with whom an aorist middle, Paoero, and an imperative, Byceo, also occur. : BdaAAw, ‘I throw,” future, Bada, Ionic and with later writers, Baddge ow ; second aorist, &6aAov; perfect, Bé62nxa ; perfect passive, BébAnyat ; first aorist passive, £6476ny ; second aorist middle, é6cAdunv. There aye also formed in epic, from an assumed form BAHMI, a third person dual, PAgrizv, eather of Spe tape ac eed ee and a third pe 174 CATALOGUE OF eon singular of the second sorist middle, iAgre, with s passive signifi- cation ; besides the infinitive, BAgo@as ; participle, BAdpevos ; optative, BAcingy, AAzio. Epic writers also form AefoAgaro, as @ third person singular of the pluperfect passive ; and be6oAgyéves, as a perfect parti- ciple passive, from an accessory form BOAEQ. *BAPEQ, usual present, Baptve, “ I load ;” from the old redical form Baoralw, “ I bear,” fatare, Baordcw, &c.; adopts in the passive the other mode of formation, according to the characteristic y; as, first ao- Béoxw, BAQ, BIBHMI, see Baivw. BiBpdoxa, “ I eat,” from BPOQ, future, Bpdow and Bpécouas, &c. ; second aorist, 26puv. Biéo, “ I live,” future, Prdcoua: ; first aorist, iioea, besides the sec- ond aorist, é6iav, of which the remaining moods are chiefly used ; as, subjunctive, 61d, Bid, &c. ; optative, Beoyy; imperative, BioG: ; infin- itive, Brdvaz ; participle, Prove. BAacraéve, “I sprout,” future, BAactyow, &c. ; second aorist, 26- Aacrov. BAHMI and BOAEG, see BdAAw. Booxw, “I feed,” fature, Booxjow, &c. BovAouat, “I will,” imperfect, tbovAduny and s6ovAseny ; future, BovAjoopa: ; perfect, BebovAnyat ; first aorist, ébovAgOyy and #ovAsOry. BPOQ, see Bibpacxe. rT. Tapuéw, “I marry,” future, yanéow, Attic, yand, also yaufow ; per- fect, yeyduyxa ; first aorist, Eynua ; first aorist infinitive, yfuac; foture middle, yauotjma: ; first aorist middle, éynudunv, from the root TAMQ. *T'éywra, a form for the perfect, similar to Gywya, used also in the signification of the imperfect and aorist, “ I cried aloud ;” participle, ye- yovds ; infinitive, yeyevety and yeywvénev. Also a new imperfect, tyeyévevy, contracted from Eyeyéveor. TENQ, the obsolete root of yeivouat (a purely poetic form) and yfvo- pas or yiyvopat, which transitively signifs, “ I beget ;” intransitively, ‘‘ Tam born,’ “ arise,” * become.” The transitive signification, how- ever, belongs only to the aorist tyervduny, “ I begat.” All the remain- ing forms in use, namely, future, yev7oouat ; second aorist, tyevouny 3 perfect, yéyova and yeyévnyat, have the intransitive signification alone. In epic, and with the poets, perfect, yéyaa ; third person plural, yeydact ; frst. person plural, yéyexev ; infinitive, yeydpuev ; participle, PEYOS, yee . IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 176 *yavle, contraded yeyéc, yeyGea; which forms are all to be deduced from the simple root T', and by change of sound T'A. 170to% ¥ Goice,” fature, yy0how, &c.; perfect middle, yéyy0a, in the signification of the present. Teysdene (Attic,gbesides yudoxa), “ I poe root, TNOQ, fature, yvooouas ; perfect, Eyvwxa; perfect passive, Eyvwopa: ; first aorist pas sive, tyydoOyv. The second aorist, formed according to- the conjuga- tion in ju, is Eyvov ; plural, Eyveper, &e. ; infinitive, yrdvas ; impera- tive, yvO0t, yyaru, Kc. ; optative, yvotny ; participle, yvovy. A. Aafva:, see AAQ. -Adava, “ I bite,” from AHKQ, fature, é7Zopas 5 perfect, dédnya, &c.'; second aorist, édaxov. Acude, “ I tame” or “ subdue,” simple root, AAMQ, whence second aorist, édduov ; subjunctive, dauzd, lengthened into dauéu and dayeia ; perfect, dédunxa ; perfect passive, dédunpat ; first aorist passive, edunOnv. AapOéve, “I sleep,” future, dapbjoouat; perfect, deddpOnxa ; second sorist, EdapGov, by transposition, épafoy ; -and, with a passive form but an active signification, éddpO7yv. i ~ #AAQ, primitive to diddoxe, ‘* I teach,” from which, with an active signification only, second aorist, Edaov or dédaoy. The most usual forms are, the second aorist passive, édayv, “ I was taught ;”’ infinitive, dajvas ; subjunctive, daziw (by an epic prolongation for dad); future, dafcouas, The passive signification belongs also to the perfect, dedanxa, dédaa, Ssddnuac. Of the middle, the epic infinitive, deddacOae, ‘to become ao- quainted with,” “inquire into,” is alone extant. Mei, see Aéw. Azidu, see Ala. Accxve, * I show,” fature, deffo, &c. The Ionians make the de- rivative forms without ¢, thus, dé&w, de§a, &c. The epic form of the perfect passive, deideyuac, is irregular. Aéuu, “ I build,” first aorist, édecua; perfect, dédunna ; to be distin guished from the like forms of the verb daydw. Aépxw, usually dépxouat, “I see,” perfect, dédopxa, with & present signification; second aorist, édpaxov (by transposition from &dapxoy), also édpdéxny and édépy6r7, all with an active signification. . Aéxopat, “ I receive,” future, défouar, &c. The epic forms of the second aorist, without a connective vowel, édéyuv, third person singu- lar, déero and &dexro; imperative, défo; infinitive, déz@cc ; participle; déypevog, are to be observed. Ade, “2: bind,” faere, Show ;. fect uviet, Myea ; perfect, didena | 2 . © e = : Fe is me oo 176 - - CATALOGUE OF _ = perfect passive, dédeua: ; firsPaocrist passive, idéfyy. “Pie third fure* passive, dedjcouat, has the signification of the simple future passive. Aéu, “ I want,” “am deficient,” passive, déouat, “* Prev need of,”.- “ beg ;” future, denow, &c. In general, the active occurs only as an im- personal ; present, deZ; subjunctive, déy ; optative, déor; infinitive, deiy ; perticiple, déov ; imperfect, édec ; first aorist, édégoe; future, degoet. AHKA, see Adxvo. A:ddoxw, “I teach,” fature, didagu ; first aorist, édédafa ; perfect, dedidaxa, &c. 8 Aidpdonw, “ I run away,” usually occurring only in compounds, bor- rows, from the root APAQ, the future, dpdcouar ; perfect, dédpaxa ; sec- “ond aorist, Edpav, ac, a; subjunctive, dpd, dépgc, dpg, &c. ; optative, dpainy ; imperative, dpa6e; infinitive, dpdvac ; participle, dpdc, all formed according to the conjugation in juz. Anu, “ I seek,” retains the long characteristic vowel in the passive form, contrary to the analogy of the conjugation in sz. Mio, “I fear,” * fly ;” diouat, “ I scare,” “ terrify,” both in use only with epic writers. Hence are deduced the perfect, dédca, “J fear,” in epic also deidca ; plural, without a connecting vowel, deidiuev, deidcre, decdiaor ; imperative, deid:O ; infinitive, decdtévat, epic deidysev ; parti- ciple, decdia¢, genitive, -rog and -Gro¢ ; third person plural of the imper- fect, edeid:cav. The common language has the present, deidw ; future, deicouac; first aorist, Edecca, epic Eddecoa ; perfect, dédocxa, with a present signification. Aoxéw, “I appear,” “ seem,” from AOKQ, future, d6fw, &c. ; per- fect, with a passive form, dédoypat, “I have appeared.” The regular formation, doxjow, &c., is more rare. APAQ, see Ardpdoxw. Advvauat, “ Iam able,” second person, éévaca: (not dévy); imperfect, yduvduny, conjugated like torauar; future, dvvjoouat ; first eorist, édvv- 7Onv and éduvdobny ; perfect, dedivayac. Avw, “I cover,” future, dvow ; first aorist, &évoa ; first aorist passive, EdvOnv. The perfect, dédixa, and the second aorist, édvy; infinitive, divat, epic duuevar ; participle, dic, have, like the middle, whose forms are regular, the signification, “ to immerse one’s self,” “to inwrap one’s self.” E. "Eyeipa, “ I wake” or “ arouse,” regular in most of its forms, perfect, byyepka (with the Attic reduplication). The middle, éyeipoua:, “I awake,” syncopates the second aorist, 7ypdunv (for Fyepdunv) ; infinitive, typioba, To this middle the perfect éypjyope (for éy#yopa) belongs IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 177 in signification, besides the epic accessory forms fypiyopfe and éyprrydp- Oaoz (as the second and third persons plural), and the infinitive, éypye- yop6az. "Eda, “I eat,” used in this form only with the epic writers and Ioni- ans, besides the perfect, é7da (with the Attic reduplication), and the fature, Edopa: (for tdotjnar). Prose writers make use of éoGiw as a pres- ent, and attach to it forms from 60, EAEQ : ect, éd7doxa as by change of vowel #doxa, with the Attic reduplication édgdoxa) ; fect passive, édjdecpac ; first aorist passive, #éécOyv. As ee a> rist active, ¢ayoy ; infinitive, payeiv. "Elona, * I sit,” future, ddotpuac. "E6éAg and Sédu, “I am willing,” future, eAgow and Yedjow, &c. "E6a, ‘I am wont,” only with epic writers, together with the perfect middle elw8a, Ionic 2wa, in the same signification. EIAQ, an obsolete form with the signification “I see,” “ perceive,” in epic yet used as a passive, eldouac, ‘I am seen,” “ appear,” “ seem,” besides the aorist elodunv or éecodunv. The primitive form is IAQ; second aorist, eldov, epic also without augment, idov ; subjunctive, ido; Optative, Idocuc; imperative, ide; infinitive, iéeiv; participle, idov; second aorist middle, eiddunyv, idduny, in the same signification. The perfect olda (“I have perceived” or “ seen into,” i. ©., “ I know”), which belongs thereto, is anomalous in formation and conjugation (vid. page 166); second aorist subjunctive, eldw ; optative, eldeiqy ; imperative, lo6e ; infinitive, eldévaz, epic, Ionic iduévas ; participle, elddg, via, dc, &c.; pluperfect, jdecv, epic dea, Attic $dn (formed from the root ed with an augment) ; second person, #dets and gdetoba, also $éyo0a ; third person, #éet, epic ydee and gdeev ; dual, #decrov or gorov ; third person, gdeiryy or Gorny ; plural, #deqev or Houev ; Gdetre or PoTe; Zdecay or goay. Epic collateral forms of this pluperfect are, first person, #eidecy ; second persons, feiderc or heidne ; third person, Heider, Heidn, or fetde. As future to olda stands elaouat, * I shall know.” Elxw, I am like,” besides the future elf, usual only in the older language. The common language has the perfect middle, fosxa, Ionic olxa ; first person plural, toixauev and focypyev, in the present significa- tion ; participle, toxac, Ionic oixdc, Attic eixoc (which is always used by the Attics for the signification probable, reasonable ; while éocad¢ in Attic only signifies similar); pluperfect, gxecy. Epic collateral forms without a connecting vowel are éixrov and ét«ryy, as third person dual of the perfect and pluperfect, and #ixro or fixro, as third person singu- lar of the pluperfect with a-passive form. *#ElAe and eldéu, Attic eiAée, “ I press,” future, eiAjaw, &c. Epic writers sdopt forme from the root ’EAQ, as, first aorist, Aca ; infinitive, 178 CATALOGUE OF A FAca: or teAca: ; participle, EAcac ; perfect passive, fedzai; second ao- rist passive, édAyyv er éd/Azv, and as third person singular pluperfect pas- sive, 6Ayro. Eluapra:, see MEIPOMAI. ; Eleiv, “ to say,” used only as an aorist ; indicative, elroy ; subjunct- ive, ela; optative, elzrorse ; imperative, elxé, in the plaral, besides elx- ere, also forere; participle, elxov. Besides these a first aorist also ela, particularly usual in the imperative, elrov, elxdru, &c. Elpe, “I say,” as a present only in epic; future, épéw, Attic épd; perfect, elpyxa; perfect passive, elpyua:; future, elpyoopat (with a mid- dle form and a passive signification) ; first aorist passive, elp7Oyv Ionic, EAp7Onv Attic ; infinitive, pyOjvat; participle, pybeic ; future, pybijoo- aa: ; from a root PEQ. Elpa, ‘‘ I connect together,” perfect passive, Zepua:; pluperfect pas- sive, téguny. Eiwéa, see Eu. "EAavve and tAdw, “I drive,” future, tAdow, Attic 2Aé, tAge, bg, &c.; infinitive, 2Agy ; first aorist, #Adoa; perfect, éAjAdaa; perfect passive, 2AjAduaz, third person plural epic, éAqAdéaraz for éAgAayvras ; first aorist passive, 7AdOnyv. EAEY@Q, EAY@Q, EAOQ, see "Epyouat. *"EArouat, “ I hope,” perfect middle, oAma ; pluperfect, éoAwety. "EAQ, see Alpéa. ENETKQ, ENEIKQ, see Gépu. *Evéro, also évvéra, “TI relate,” “ tell,” second aorist, Evcoroy ; subjunctive, éviorw ; optative, éviomouut ; imperative, Evcore ; infini- tive, évoreiy ; future, éviomjow and bviyw. From it must be distin- guished évirrw or évicow, “ I chide,” “ address harshly,” to which the double form of the second aorist belongs, namely, #virrasrov and évévirov. . *Evivobe, “ts or les thereon,” an old perfect form, with the signifi- cation of the present and aorist, used only in composition, as, érevavobe and the like, formed from an obsolete root, ’ENOQ, by the insertion of o, or from "ENE@Q by change of the vowel, and in both cases with the Attic reduplication. *Evinrw, see under ’Evérw. *Evvvut, “I dress,” in the present formed regularly like deixvue, takes an augment only in the perfect; future, ow and foow ; first ao- rist, Eooa ; infinitive, Eoas ; perfect passive, eluat, and in compounds also Eouar; pluperfect passive, efuzv ; second person, eloo and &oo0; third person, oro and Eeoro (from touxy, ééouny). *Eravupeiv, “to enjoy,” as second aorist infinitive, from the indica- tive, éxzipov ; subjunct ve, éxaqtpw; second aorist middle, émyupduyy ; IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 179 ‘fret aorist middle, éryvpdyqy ; future, Exavpfooua:. The present is ésravpicxa, of rare occurrence. "Exicrapat, “ I know,” imperfect, #rtorduny (like torayaz) ; future, éxcorycopar ; first aorist, 7rioTH7Ony. Exo, “ I am occupied,” “ am about something,” takes ec in prefixing the augment of the imperfect, elroy ; second aorist, Zovrov ; subjunctive, on ; infinitive, oreiy (used only in compounds). The middle fxouat, “I follow,” is also much used in prose ; imperfect, elszdunyv ; future, &poua: ; second aorist, éorduny ; subjunctive, omduac and fomupat ; optative, oroiuny and éoroiuny ; imperative, ood, epic oréo and oreio ; infinitive, ovéoGa: and éoréodat ; participle, omdueveg and éondpuevoc. The forms.of the moods of thissecond aorist, with e prefixed, are pecu- liar to the poets alone, and can never be used in composition. ’"Epdw, ‘I love,” has, besides the present, only the imperfect, fowy, with an active form. The remaining tenses have a passive form, but are used in an active sense, as, first aorist, 7pdo0nv ; future, Epacjc0- pat. The present épduac alone has also a passive signification. A po- etic collateral form with an active signification is &paya:; &rst aorist, Hpacduny. "EPTQ and &pdw, see ‘Péfw. "Epopa:, “ I ask,” occurs in the general language only as an aorist, namely, 7pdu77v, 7peTo, to which the remaining moods must also be added, although the infinitive is accented Epeo@ar as well as épéofat. Future, épjoouac. All deficiency is supplied by Jpwrdw. The Ionians have, instead of it, the present elpoyat, imperfect elpdury, future elp7- copat. "Eppa, “ I go away,” future, éppjow ; first aorist, 7ppnoa. "Epv6aive, also épevfw, “ I make red,” future, Epvinw ; first aorist, hpvOnva and hpevoa ; perfect, 7pvenxa. "Epix, “I keep back,” future, tpvgw; first aorist, Epvga (rare) ; more usual, second aorist, 7pvxaxov. "Epyouat, “I go,” forms from "EAEYOQ the future éAevoouas or tA- evootuat ; second aorist, 7AvGor, Attic 7A@ov, Doric 7vGov ; infinitive, bAGeiv ; imperative, £00, é&c.; perfect, £AZAvOa, epic also elAjdova. 'Ecbiu, ‘I eat,” see "Edw. Etéw, xaBevdu, “I sleep,” future, evdjou, xabevdjow ; imperfect, éxdGevdov, more rarely xaOnidov and «afecidov. Evpioxe, “I find,” from EYPQ; second aorist, edpov ; imperative, evpé ; future, evpjow ; perfect, ebpyxa ; perfect passive, etpnyas ; first aorist passive, evpéOyv : aorist middle, *tpdp7v and evpauny. "ExGopua, “I am hated,” future, éy6yjcoyat; perfect, 7xOnuat. | "Exo, “J have,” foture, fo and oxfow ; second acrist, toxov ; infin 180 CATALOGUE OF itive, oxely ; saipuatlives ox ; optative, croigy ; imperative, oxt, and also oxéc (for ové6, according to the conjugation in 4); perfect, Eoy=ea. Passive future, oyeOjaoue:. Middle, future, Efovas and cypoaua ; sec- ond aorist, Zoydunv. From the root 2XQ, whence the sorist is hor. rowed, a new present is formed, with the prefix ¢, namely, icyu, “ I hold or keep,” to which also the future ox¥ow belongs in signifieation. The following, es compounds of yu, must be adduced on account of certain irregularities : 1. dvéxouat, ‘J endure,” takes a double augment; as, imper- fect, #veczéurv ; second aorist, veczbuyy. 3. durézo, “ I wrap up,” imperfect, duxeizor ; fature, dupéfe ; second aorist, jurtoyxov ; infinitive, dumecyeiv. Middle, du- xtzopar or dumiozveipas, “I have on ;* fature, dupéfowas ; second aorist, #uRntoyouyy. 8. treozrotuat, “ I promise,” foture, vrocy#oouat; second a0 rist, dreoxéuny ; imperative, from the passive, dxocxébyrt ; t, oréoxnpeat. ‘Eo, “I boil,” future, &pioo, dc. ; verbal adjective, épGug and éy_- réc, éyntéos. Z. Zau, “I kve,” takes, im contrection, 7 instead of a, as, second persons SYe; third person, (7, d&c. ; infinitive, (gv. Imperative, (70 (according to the conjugation in 4); imperfect, Kaw, Enc, &c Zevyvuus, “I joen,” future, Cevgw, &c. ; second aorist passive, Kiy7n Zovyyu, “I gird,” future, (dow, &c.; perfect passive, Mwoua: ; first aorist passive, {aoGyu. H. "Hye, “FT sv.” In prose, the compound adGnuar, which generally takes the augment in the preposition, is more usual; imperfect, Exa6j- av, and also forms peculiar moods ; as, subjunctive, xdé0apuas; opta- tive, xaGoiuny ; imperative, xd6700 (also xd@ov, for ndeco, with the a dropped). As varieties of dialect, the collateral forms of the third per- son plural, 7vrat and 7T0, are to be observed, which in Ionic are Earaz, Baro, and in epic elaraz, elaro. 8. @ANQ, see Sujoxw. Odrru, “I bury,” forms, from the root GAGQ, future, Sdpo ; first sorist, Saya; perfect, réraga ; perfect passive, réGauuce ; first aorist ive, dhipoz7; second sorist passive, Eniday, and so an. Froin this IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 181 is to be distinguished the obsolete form OAGQ, “ I am astonished,” from which ré@n7a, as a perfect middle, with a present signification, and éra- $0, as a second aorist, occur in the poets. Géw, “I run,” future, Yevoouar or Sevootuar ; the remaining tenses ‘are supplied by the forms of rpéyw. Oryydve, “I touch,” forms, from Yiyw, future, Oifw and difoua: ; second aorist, E6cyov. Ovjoxe, “I die,” forms, from OANQ, second aorist, Savoy; future, Vavotuat ; perfect, réOvnxa (by transposition of the radical letters), be- sides the syncopated forms, first person plural, ré@vauev; third person plural, reGvdor; optative, reOvainy; imperative, ré@vaG; infinitive, reOvdvat; participle, reOvqxec, together with reOvedc, rePvnac, TePvet- Gc. From the perfect is formed a future, reGv7gw and refyjfouat, in frequent use with the Attics. Copéw and OOP, see Ypdoku. Opédu, see Tpédu. Opéxo, see Tpéxo. Optrro, “ I bruise,” future, Optyw, &c. ; second aorist passive, Ezpé- *Opdoxa, “I spring,” forms, from OOPQ, second aorist, oper ; fature, dopotpat. OTSQ, see Tiga. Ob, “ I sacrifice,” future, Piow, &c. ; first aorist passive, EriOyy. l TAQ, see Elda. "Iw, xabilw, “I seat,” “make to sit,” future, yow, xabcljow, or «aQid (for xa0iow) ; first aorist, éxa@ioa. ‘Ixvéowat, more rarely fxw, “I come,” future, tw; usual, ouae ; first aorist, /Ea; usual, first aorist, [fov; second aorist middle, ixé- porv ; perfect, Iyzat. In prose, the compound dugixvéoyzaz is alone used. TAdoxopat, “ I propitiate,” “ appease,” future, lAdcopat, epic lAdooo- peat (from the root tAdopa: or tAayas, which are still used in single forms with the epic writers); first aorist, Aacduqy. Of the active, (Ado and tAnut, * I am propitious,” an imperative, 1Aj6c; and of the perfect a subjunctive, lAjxw ; optative, [Ajxoyus; occur with the epic writers. “Inrapat, see éropas. K. *KAAQ, a primitive for the derivation of several verbal forms : 1. for calvvpat, “ I am distinguished,” “ excel,” perfect, xéxacpar ; pluperfect, kxexdopay : 2. for xpd, “I sie aie xexachow ; second aorist 182 CATALOGUE OF infinitive, xexadeZy ; participle, cexaddév. Middle, xjdoua, “ Iam troub- led,” future, xexadjoouat; perfect, xéxnéa, with a present signification. 8. For ydfw or ydlouat, “ I give way,” second aorist, xexadouny, be- sides the regular Eyaodunv or Exacoduny. Kabélouat, xabetdu, xdOnuat, xabila, see Eopat, ebdu, juat, Yo Kaivupat, see KAAQ. Kaiw, “I burn,” Attic xdéw, with long a, and without contraction ; future, katow ; first aorist, Exavoa; perfect, céxavxa ; perfect passive, Kéxavuas ; first aorist passive, éxavOnv; second aorist passive, éxdyy. Besides the given form of the first aorist, must be observed the double epic form Exna and éxeca, and the Attic &xea, all formed without o; sub- junctive, xjw; optative, xjatuc; imperative, xeiov; infinitive, xjat ; participle, xefag. Also in epic éxyduny and éxecduyy occur in the mid- dle form. : Katéw, “TI call,” future, xadéow, Attic xaAd ; first aorist, Exadeca ; perfect, xéxAnxa; first aorist passive, ExA70nv ; perfect passive, xéxAn- pat, “I am named,” “ am called ;” optative, xexAgunv, xéxAgo, &c. ; future passive, xAnOfcoua: ; third future passive, xexAjoonar. Middle, in the same signification with the active, future, kadotpar (for xadéco- pac); first aorist, éxadecauny. Kdyuvo, “I grow weary,” from KAMQ ; second aorist, Exauov ; fu- ture, cayotuac; perfect, xéxunxa ; participle, xexunxdc, epic xexundc. Keiar, “I lie,” second person, xeioat, &c. ; subjunctive, xéwpyat, néy, &c.; optative, xeoiuny; imperative, xefoo; infinitive, xeicOaz ; participle, xeiuevoc ; imperfect, éxeiunv, Execoo, &c.; future, xeioomat ; epic and Ionic collateral forms of the third person plural present are xei- arat and xéaraz for xetvrat. In composition with prepositions, the ac- cent recedes in the indicative to the preposition ; but in the infinitive it remains on the root; as, xardxecyat, but xaraxeio@at. Kepavvuyt, “ I mingle,” from xepdw, which is still found in the epic language ; future, xepdicw, Attic xepd ; first aorist, Exepioa, epic xép- acoa, also Expyoa; perfect, xexpaxa; perfect passive, xéxpduac and kexépaopat ; first aorist passive, éxpaOyv and éxepaoOny. Kepdaiva, “I gain,” future, xepddvd and xepéjow ; first aorist, éxép- énva, éxépdava, and éxépdyoa. K7ydw, see KAAQ. Kipynyt, an epic collateral form of xepdvvupt, which see. Kiydvo, “I reach,” “ overtake,” subjunctive, xeyG, epic xtyetw; op- tative, xvyeinv ; infinitive, xeyjvat; participle, xcyeic; third person dual of the imperfect, xey#r7v, all formed from KIXHMI ; future, «uy- ow and xixnooua1 ; second aorist, Excyor. Kixpyyt, see Xpdw. ~- IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183 KAdlo, “TI sound,” future, xAdy&w; first aorist, éxAayéa ; = middle, xéxAnya ; second aorist, &xAayov. Kiaiv, “I weep,” Attic xAdu, with long a, and without seucaciings future, xAatcouat or KAavootpat ; first aorist, ExAavoa ; perfect, xéx- Aavxa. The future xAaijow or.xAajow is more rare. *KAvo, “ I hear,” imperative, xAv@: and xéxAv6. Kopévvupt, “I satisfy,” future, xopéow ; first aorist, éxdpeoa; per- fect, xexépnxa ; perfect passive, kexdpeouzat, Ionic and epic xexdpnmat. *Kopicouw, “ I arm,” perfect passive, cexdpvduat. Kpd¢u, “I cry,” perfect middle, xexpaya ; first person plural, xéxpay- sev; imperative, xéxpay@c; third future passive, xexpdfouac ; second aorist, Expdyov. Kpepavvupt, “ I suspend,” passive, xpeudvyvpat, “ Iam suspended,” and as-a middle, “ I suspend myself ;” xpéuauas (like torapac), * I hang,’’ to which are joined, subjunctive, xpéuwyae ; optative, cpeuaiuny ; future active, xpeudow, Attic xpeud, gc, d, &c. The aorist passive éx- pexdoOny is common to the passive, middle, and intransitive; but the future passive xpeuacbyoouat belongs only to xpeydvvupat, since xpéuae pac has a peculiar future, xpeujoouaz, “ I shall hang,” “ hover.” . Kreivo, “I kill,” root KTE, and, by changing the vowel, KTA ; fu- ture, crevd, Ionic xravéw ; first aorist, Exrecva ; second aorist, Exravov, besides epic xray, ac, a (formed according to the conjugation in jz, as, Edpav, from didpdoxw) ; third person plural, Exray for Exracay ; sub- junctive, xr; infinitive, ardvat, xTduevar, xtduev; participle, Krd¢ ; perfect, Exraxa; perfect middle, &xrova ; first aorist passive, éxrdQyyv or éxravOny, besides the poetic form éxrduyy ag passive to the second ao- rist xray. Kvuvéo, “ I kiss,” future, cvvjcopa: or (from KYQ) xvow ; first aorist, Exvoa. A. Aayyévu, “I receive by lot” or “ fate,” root AAXQ and AHXQ, fu- ture, A7fopat; second aorist, EAaxov ; perfect, elAnya or AéAoyxa (some- times called a perfect middle), as from AETXQ. Aapbdave, “ I take,” root AABQ and AHBQ, future, Ajppoyat ; seeond aorist, EAabov ; perfect, elAnga; perfect passive, elAnupac ; first aorist passive, elAnd@yy ; second aorist middle, éAa6éunv. The Ionians form AeAdénxa, and, from AAMBQ, the future Aduypouat, first aorist passive bAdudOrnv, perfect passive AéAaupat, first aorist middle tAaypayuny. Aav@déve, more rarely A76u, “ I am concealed,” future, Ajnow ; second sorist, EAafov; perfect middle, AéAnfa. Middle, AavOdvoua, more rarely Aj0opat, “I forget,” future, Ajoouac; second aorist, AaBopny ; perfect passive, AéAnopat. 184 CATALOGUE OF Aaxéw or Adoxe, “I resound,” second asorist, EAaxoy ; future, aad couat; perfect, AéAdxa and AéAyaa. ae 1. “J say,” forms no perfect active im this signification, but uses instead of it elpyxa (see elpw), otherwise wholly regular ; future, Aéfu ; first aorist, EAega; perfect passive, AéAeypa: ; first aorist passive, bAéxOnv. 2. “I gather,” future, Aéfw, &c. ; perfect, efAoxya ; perfect passive, elAeyyat; second aorist passive, éAéyyv ; second future passive, Aéynoopa:. 3. Middle, “ I lay myself down,” future, Aéfopac ; first aorist, (Aefduny ; third person singular, second aorist, Aécro, without a connecting vowel. Acadéyoua:, “I converse,” perfect, dledeypat ; first aorist, dseAézOnv. Hence it unites in itself the forms given under 1 and 2. AHBQ, see Aaybavw. A70u, see AavOdva. AHXQ, see Aayydvw. Aove, “I wash.” In this verb the Attice almost invariably contract the connecting vowel of the termination with the ov; as, &ov, third person singular of the imperfect ; EAouyey, first person plural. Fyesent passive, Aotyar, &c. ; infinitive, Aovc@a:. M. *Maioua:, see MAQ. MAKQ, “TI bleat,” From this obsolete primitive form there remain enly the secon aonst Euaxov, and the perfect uéunna, participle nepu- dxvia, which are associated with the common present pyadopac. -Mav@ave, “I learn,” from MA@Q, second aorist, fuaGoy ; future, uabjoouat ; perfect, neudOnxa. *Mapvopat, “I fight,” usual only in the present and imperfect ; op- tative, papvoiuny. Mdyoua:, “I fight,” future, payéoopat and paxjoonat, Attic paxov- pac; first aorist, éuayeoduny ; perfect, aa and pepaxnpeat. *MAQ, an obsolete primitive form, signifying, 1. ‘ I desire,” “ strive,” and has in this signification only the perfect, uéuaa ; first person plural, péuauev ; participle, ueuaedc; genitive, -dro¢ and roc; third person plural pluperfect, uésuacav. 2. “I taste,” “ feel,” in which the present paioua: is usual ; future, udooua: ; first aorist, évacduny. *Mecpozat, “ I obtain,” from the root MEPQ, perfect middle, Eupopa ; ' perfect passive, eluapuae. Hence eluapraz, “ it is ordained by fate.” MéAAw, “ F am about,” “am to come,” imperfect, fuerAov, with the temporal augment ; future, peadAjow, &c. MéAw, “‘ I concern,” “ give concern to,” “lie at the heart of,” is mostly ueed in the active form only, ae an impersonal, uéAe: ; future, peAgoet, ~ 4 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185 &c. ; perfect epic, uéende ; middle, uéAouat, “ F am concerned ;” future, pedjooza: ; first aorist, tueAnOqv. MéubAwxa, see MOAQ. Méw, ‘‘ I remain,” perfect, weuévnxa ; perfect middle, péuova. Miyvuut, also picyw, “ I mix,” future, uifw ; first aorist, guéa ; per- fect passive, véutyyac ; first aorist passive, a ; second aorist pas - sive, duiyny. Misvqoxe, “I remind,” from MNAQ, future, prow, &c. Middle, pyuvhnoxopat, ‘I remember,” “ mention ;”’ first aorist, éuvjoOyv ; future, pevnoPjoopuat ; perfect, wéuvnuat, “ I am mindful of,” “think of,” “re- member ;” subjunctive, wéuvapat ; optative, weuypuny and peyvouny ; to which is joined the third future passive, peurvjoouat, “I shall ever bear in mind.” *MOAQ, “TI go,” future, oAoctyzar ; second aorist, &uoAov ; perfeet, péubAwxa (formed from MOAQ by a transposition of the radical letters, therefore properly péuAwxa, and by the insertion of 8). The usual a ent thereto is BAdcxw. *Muxdouat, “ I bellow,” second aorist, Eutixov; perfect, péuidxa ; from MYKQ. N. *Naiw, “I dweil,” future, vaccouar ; first aorist middle, tvacoduny 3 first aorist passive, évdcOny ; perfect passive, vévacyat. The first a0- rist active, évaoce, has the transitive significatiuu, “J bring tnto a dwelling.” Ndoow, “I stuff,” future, vdgw ; first aorist, évaga ; perfect passive, vévaopuat. Népw, “ I distribute,” future, veud and veyjow ; first aorist, Evecua ; perfect, vevéunna ; first aorist passive, éveu7nOyy and tveuéOyv. Néw, ‘“ I swim,” future, vedooua: and vevoodiuar ; first aorist, Evevoa, &e. Nife, ‘1 wash,” borrows its tenses from virra, future, vipo, &e O. "Olu, “* I smell,” “ emit an odour,’’ future, d¢70w ; perfect middle, éduda, with the reduplication, and a present meaning. Olyo and olyvuut, usually dvoiyvupe, ‘ I open,” imperfect, eee ; first aorist, dvévéa; infinitive, dvoigar ; perfect, dvépya ; perfect mid- dle, dvéwya, with an intransitive signification, ‘J stand open.” Epic writers generally use only the temporal, not the syllabic, augment, and ° 4 is then changed into wi; thus, first aorist, diga. Olda, see Edw. Q2 186 CATALOGUE OF Oloua: or ofuat, “I think,” second person, ole: ; imperfect, Odsayy also duny ; future, olgooua: ; first aorist, (gOyy ; infinitive, olgOjrat. Epic writers lengthen the diphthong, and say dfquaz, or, with an active form, étw, and form the remaining tenses to it regularly ; as, first aorist middle, Giodgry ; first aorist passive, OloGyy. ; Olyopas, “ I depart,” or “ am gone,” future, olyjooua: ; perfect, cxy- pat; or, in an active form with a, olywxa. ‘ _ OIQ, see oloua: and ¢épa. *Olcbaivw or bA10OGve, “ F slide,” future, dAccOgow ; second aorist, bAccOov. "OAAvut, “ FE destroy,” from OAQ, future, dAéou, Attic 616 ; first ao- rist, OAcoa ; perfect, dAdAexa. Middle, dAAvpuat, “ I perish ;” future, oAoduat ; second aorist, GAdunv. The perfect middle dAwAa has the ~ _ Feduplication. “Onvuut, “I swear,” future, duotpac ; first aoxist, duoca ; perfect, budpona ; perfect passive, ducuoopuac, but in the third person also dud- porat. "Oudpyvou, “ I wipe off,” future, dzdpfw, &c. *Ovivnt, “ I am of use,” forms the present and imperfect like lorguc, but the remaining tenses from the primitive ONAQ ; future, dv7ow ; first aorist, Gvyjoa. Middle, dvivauac, “I have advantage ;”’ second aorist, bvduny, epic and Ionic dvjuny ; optative, dvaiuny ; infinitive, dvacber. *Ovouat, “ I revile,” present and imperfect like didovaz, the rest from ONOQ ; future, dvdcouat ; first aorist, Ovocdsiy ; firet aorist passive, ovécbyyv. ’O11Q, “I see,” perfect, Srwmra ; future, dpouat ; first aorist passive, &~¢67y (with an active as well as a passive signification) ; perfect passive, Guyat; future, d¢67copat. ‘Opdw, “ I see,” imperfect, éopwr, Ionic Spwv ; perfect, édpaxa ; per- fect passive, édpayat ; first aorist passive, éwpdOyy. All the remaining forms are wanting to this verb, and are supplied by those given under OIIQ and eidw. "Opvunt, “I excite,” from OPQ, future, dpow; first aorist, dpoa ; second aorist, dpopov, with the reduplication. Middle, dpvupa:, “ I arise ;”” second aorist, Gpduzy, or, by rejecting the connecting vowel, &punv ; second person, wpco ; imperative, dpceo or dpoo ; perfect, dpo- peuat ; perfect middle, dpwpa. "Oogpaivouat, “I smell,” future, do¢pjoouat ; second aorist, do¢pé- #0, also dogpduny. ¢ 'Ogeidw, “ I am indebted,” “am obliged,” “ ought,” fature, dpecAjou, &c. The second aorist d¢eov is used merely to designate a wish, “ oh that !” “would that !” and the more usual present is bgAoxdvw ; fusure, bgAgow, &c. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 187° 2 II. TIAOQ, see Hdoyw. s Tlutla, ‘ I jest,” future, ratfoua: and raecoduat ; first aorist, face ; perfect, zéraiaa; perfect passive, réracouat and mératypat. Ilaiw, “I strike,” future, usually rarzow, but the remaining tenses regular; first aorist, Exa:ca; perfect, wéxacxa; first aorist passive, éxaicbny. IIldoyo, “I suffer,” from ITAOQ, second aorist, Erafov. Perfect middle, zérov@a, fram IIENOQ. The form wéry@a for the perfect, &xyoa for the first aorist, and w7couaz for the future, are more rare, ‘and are proper to the poetic language alone. A peculiar Homeric form is xéroo8e, as second person plural of the perfect. TleiOu, ‘‘ I persuade,’ proceeds regularly in the active, but forms, be- sides the first aorist &recoa, a second aorist, &riOov (with the epic re- duplication wém:8ov), and likewise an epic future, rercOjow. Passive and middle, ei#ouat, the latter voice with the meaning, ‘J belzeve,” ‘‘ follow,” “obey ;”? second sorist middle, éri6dunv, with reduplication , werOdunv ; perfect middle, rérorBa, “ I trust.” WeAdgu, ‘ I make to approach,” “ bring near,” regular up to the epic forms of the second aorist, éxAjunv (as middle, according to the conju- gation in jz), and the first aorist passive, reAdoOzv. Tlérporat, see TIOPQ. - Tlérro, see Mécow. *Ilép0u, ‘‘ I lay waste,” second aorist, Expafoy, by transposition of the radical letters, from EmapBov. Iléoou, rérto, ‘ I boil,” future, tépo, &c., from rérro. Tleceiv, see rintu. Terdvvuut, “I spread,” future, retéow, Attic ret ; perfect passive, aénradpat (for reréracuat) ; first aorist passive, érerdobny. Tléroza:, “I fly.” From this primitive form, by syncope, we have the second aorist éxréumy, infinittve mréoOaz, future rerjoouat (usual form mrjoopa), According to the conjugation in ge are formed the present, mérayae and trrauac; firet aorist, érrduyy; second aorist, éexrnv; infinitive, xrjvac; participle, wrd¢; perfect, wémrnxa. Be- sides these, epic writers use the lengthened forms rrordopat, mwrdopat, ,and also zoréouaz, the tenses of which are formed regularly ; as, perfect, memroTnual, &c. TIETQ, see Iirra. TletOouar, see TvvOavopzat. Tyyvupe, I fiz,” future, m#fo, é&c. ; first aorist passive, ér7yOqy ; gveand eorist passive, éxdy7y ;. perfect middle, réxgya, “ I stand fast.” ‘ B88 CATALOGUE OF IiurAnu, “I fil,” infinitive, myzxAdva:, formed by reduplication from the root ILAAQ, wherein u is inserted to strengthen the syllable. This is frequently rejected by the poets, and also in prose, when in com- position an additional 4 happens to stand immediately before the redu- plication (as, for example, éurimAnuc). Future, rAjow, &c. ; perfect passive, réxAnopac ; first aorist, étAgoOnv. Besides these are to be ob- served an epic second aorist middle, éAjuny or xAnuny ; optative, Aeiunv, with an intransitive signification, “I am full,” and a perfect middle, véxAn6a, likewise with an intransitive present signification, and derived from an accessory form 7470w, which is also not unusual as a present. Tliuapnut, “I set on fire,” infinitive, ryumpdvac, proceeds in the pres- ent and imperfect like tornue; the remaining forms are from ILPAQ or p7nOw ; thus, future, zpyow, &c. ; first aorist passive, éxpyoOnv. Here, also, the inserted to strengthen the syllable is omitted when an addi- tional stands immediately before the reduplication ; as, éusimpnyc. Ilivo, “I drink,” from THQ, future, riouae; second aorist, értov ; infinitive, cetv, &c. ; imperative, wif. All the rest are formed from TIOQ ; perfect, wéxwxa; perfect passive, wérromac ; first aorist passive, érdOny ; future passive, to@poouat. The forms riow, Erica, have the transitive signification, “to give todrink,” to which mirioxw is usual as" a present. _ Tlexpdoxo, “ I sell,” from mepdo, future, mepdow ; first aorist, éze- paca. Then from IIPAQ, perfect, wéxpaxa ; perfect passive, ménpa- pac; first aorist passive, éxpa6yy ; third future passive, tempaoomat. Ilirrw, “I fall,” forms from WETQ the future, recotuar ; second gorist, Execov; and from JITOG the perfect, rémruxa. IQ, see ILiva. TIAdlo, “ I cause to wander,” “ drive about,” future, rAdyée, &c. TIAAQ, 71780, see ILiurAnue. Wréw, “I sail,” future active, tAevow ; future middle, rAevoopas and mAdootar ; first aorist active, ErAevoa, &c.; perfect passive, nénAevopat ; first aorist passive, bxAedoOry. TAjoou, “ I strike,” future, tA7gw, &c. ; second aorist passive, é#r- Anynv, but in the compounds érAdyyv. An epic form is the second ao- rist active, rémAnyov, with the reduplication. TIA@w, an Ionic accessory form of z/Aéw, whence a second aorist, &- Ao, according to the conjugation in wu ; participle, rAdec. IIvéw, “I breathe,” future, rvevow or mvevootpuat, &c. ; first aorist passive, éxvevoOnv ; perfect passive, *rérvuuat, “I possess spirit,” ‘Sam wise.” Hobéw, “J long for,” future, robpow and roéow, usually robtoquas ; _ IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 189 perfect, werdOnxa; perfect passive, wemd@nuac; first aorist passive, brroBéoOnv. . Tlopety, ropov, “ I gave,” a defective second aorist with the poets. To the same theme (in the sense of “ to distribute’’) belongs the perfect passive wénpwrat, ‘it is ordained by fate ;’’ participle, mempopévog. IIOQ, see Ilivw. : TIPOQ, see Ilopeiy. TITAQ, see ILerdyvuut, Méropac. Iryoou; “ I cower down,” future, mr7gw, and the remaining forms regular ; perfect participle, memrydc. ITTOQ, see Ilirrw. uv@dvoua:, ‘I learn,” from revOouac (poetic), future, revoouas ; second aorist, éwvOduny ; perfect, mérvopuac. P. Pio, “ I do,” future, éfw, or, from EPTQ, future, Epfw, Sc. ; per- fect middle, fopya. Péw, “ I flow,” future, pevow; future middle, Jevooua: ; first aorist active, &jpevoa. In the same signification, however, the second aorist &pS6nv (formed according to the conjugation yt, from a root ‘PYEQ), with the future /ujoouac and perfect £6inxa, is more usual. ‘Péw, “ I say,” see Eipw. Pryvyu, “I rend,” future, 67g, &c.; second aorist passive, £Afd- ynv ; perfect middle, &pwya, with an intransitive signification, “‘ J am rent.” : ‘Pryéw, “ I shudder,” future, pryjow, &c. ; perfect middle, *éfitya. 'Pirre and pirréw, “I throw,” both forms usual in the present and imperfect ; all the rest from the first only; future, Jipo, &c. ; second adrist passive, EApidnv. "Pvéw, see ‘Péw. Povrvpt, ‘I strengthen,” future, poow, &c.; perfect passive, Eppwo- peac; imperative, &bpwoo, “ farewell ;” first aorist passive, Eppdobiy. 2. LZaAarivo, “ I sound a trumpet,” future, cadntyéw, &e. LBévvyue, “ I extinguish,” future, o6fow, &c.; perfect passive, &o- 6eopac ; first aorist passive, éo6écOnv. The perfect to6nxa, and the sec- ond aorist fo67v, infinitive o6jvat, have the intransitive signification, “‘ to be extinguished,” like the passive. *Zevu, “ I put in motion,” first aorist, Zoceva, formed without o; and, by doubling the o in annexing the augment, perfect passive, Ecovpat ; first aorist passive, £oovOrv. ‘ . » 190 CATALOGUE OF Laedivyyus, “ I scatter,” future, oxeddow, Attic oxedd, &c. ; perfoct passive, éoxédacuat. xXKéddAw, “ I dry up,” first aorist, 2oxyAa (an epic form, as from a root ZKAAQ). Middle, oxéAAopat, “ for Ge Regier, “nie wees =” ever. are Noch “Rh wed Jeo gence: 5. Toes are tf er. Daw | : kT SES wT SS NE. € There ate fy net”. Gaaiee (5 ane’, ant Peontiy op, Soe the Guliogh ments wf this rade, Che Sa 1 Nowss of the arte, sad cati caers ta the B 2. The 3 The ake. a3 sso th Ia the Ext Owe, bow S The genitive pl 202 CONJUNCTIONS. CONJUNCTIONS, &c. “s AAAA. 5 1. ’AAA4 is an adversative conjunction, and answers generally to the English “but.” From this meaning arise others, however, such as, ““well, then,” ‘‘ therefore,” in which case GAAd is generally elliptical. Thus, GAA’ ioft, ore &Eec row? obtruc: “ Well, then, know that this will be so.” Supply ob« avriorjow, or the like; ‘ I will not oppose, but, on the contrary, know,” &c. So, in the following passage of Xenophon, it occurs in four different senses, all of which may be traced by means of ellipses to the primitive meaning of ‘ but.” ’AAAG ua Av’, gn, obx ab- Tog EAxeobat mpoc ce BovAopat, GAAG oe mpoc éué mropevecbar. *AAAA mopevoouat, Eon, povoyv vrodéxov. 'AAA’ vrodéfopal ce, Edn: bav pH TiC gtAwrépa cov Evdov 7. “‘ Nay, indeed,’ replied Socrates, ‘I do not wish to be dragged unto you, but you to come to me.’ ‘Well, then,’ satd The- odota, ‘I will come; do you only receive me.” ‘ Why, I will receive you,’ replied Socrates, ‘if there be not some one dearer than you within.’ ” 2. ’AAAd ydp. In this combination ydp introduces a reason for the opposition, &c., expressed by dAAd. Thus, adAAd yap Kpéovta Actoou, mavow Tov¢ mapecTarac Adyouc. ‘ But I will check what I am at pres- ent saying, for I sce Creon.” Sometimes, however, the reference is more latent, and a clause is to be supplied between 4AAd and ydp from what precedes. Thus, in Plato, Rep. 2, p. 336, we have, dAAd yap ép Gdov dixnv ddcouev, where we must repeat from the previous clause, obk alnusoe adradAdgouev. ‘ But we shall not escape unharmed, for we shall render atonement in Hades.” In many instances the reference in GAAGd ydp is to be supplied by some general remark, such as, “ but this was not at all surprising, for ;” ‘“‘ but this was impoasible, for,” é&ec. 3. ’AAW oty ye. These particles are often joined together, inasmuch as, along with the opposition, a consequence of what has preceded is also expressed. Thus, dA’ oty roirév ye Tov xpévov yrrov andye Eao- pear. “ Yet (aAAd) Iwill, for this reason (ovv), now at least (ye) be less disagreeable.” 4. When joined with ovdé it strengthens the sense; as, GAA’ obdé metpdoouat, Nay, I will not even try.” Frequently, in this construc- tion, od ydvov ov is to be supplied in what precedes ; as, in the present instance, we may say, “ J will not only not do so, but I will not even try.” . 5. In dAAd rot the particle roc strengthens the force of GAAd; “ but, indeed,” “why, that, indeed,” “why, as for that,” &c. Thus, 4A2’ you rot, “ Why, thatis a pleasant thing enough” rd CONJUNCTIONS. ; 203 . AN. 1. The particle dv, for which the epic writers use xé or xév, cannot - well be expressed by any corresponding particle in English, but only gives to a sentence an air of uncertainty and mere possibility. It is em- ployed, therefore, to modify or strengthen the subjunctive and optative ; and is also employed with the indicative, in order to impart to it more or less of uncertainty. 2. This particle commonly stands after one or more words in a clause, and is thus distinguished from the éy which is formed by contraction from édv. This latter particle dv usually begins a clause, and has the meaning of ‘‘2f,” &c. The Attic prose writers usually change it into #v, the Attic poets always. 3. The particle édy, “tf,” is compounded of the conditional ef and the dy mentioned in the first paragraph. 4. The Gy first mentioned is frequently put twice, sometimes evén thrice, in a clause or sentence. In some cases, where the dy occurs twice, one of these particles attaches itself to a finite verb and the other to a participle or infinitive ; as, dpdvrec Gv éypjoarvto dy “ If they had seen they would have used.” Many cases occur, however, where this explanation will not answer, and where the second or repeated dv mtst be regarded as brought in merely to indicate more plainly the idea of uncertainty intended to be expressed. Thus, GAAd xdv evfaivto av ye- véo@at: “ But they might, perhaps, have wished tt to happen.” APA. 1. The primary power of dpa is that of deducing consequences from premises, and hence it has usually the signification of “therefore.” It is regularly employed, therefore, in the conclusion of syllogisms ; as, ed yap elot Bupol, eict Kai Seoi: GAAG piv eiot Bupot: eioiv dpa nai Seot. “For tf there are altars, there are also gods. But there certainly aré altars ; therefore there are yods too.”” When joined with el, ef uz, or dv, it signifies ‘tf, then,” “tf, tndeed,” or, more probably, “ ¢onse- quently.”” Hence it serves for an emphatic asseveration, as if founded on an inference. 2. Different from this is the adverb dpa, which is an interrogative par- ticle, like the Latin num or utrum. Thus, dpa xarddndaov 5 BovAouat Aéyerv; ‘Is, then, what I wish to say evident?” When a negative answer is expected, it has generally the particle u7 attached to it. Thus, éav dé cov mpooxarnyopjow, Ste dia TO GyacOat avTov, Kal ebvoixdg Exeig mpocg abrov, dpa py drabdAAccbar ddgerg tn’ Buot; “ But if I shall still farther allege against you, that, in consequence of your admi- 204 CONJUNCTIONS. ration of him, you feel also well disposed towards him, will you on tha= account think that you are slandered by me?” If we wish to express the Latin nonne, it is done by dp’ od, and sometimes even by dpa alone. 8. The interrogative dpa is placed first in a clause or sentence; but the dpc first mentioned stands always after one or several words, andi. even at the close of a proposition. TAP. ; 1. Tép, “for,” never stands at the beginning of a proposition or clause, but, instead of it, ca? ydép is used at the beginning, like etentm in Latin. In Greek, the proposition of which that with ydp assigns the cause is often omitted, inasmuch as it is easily understood, and is passed over by the speaker in the vivacity of discourse. Thus, in the answer so common in Plato, we have fort yap obra, “ (Certainly) for so tt is.” So it is often used in questions, because an additional member may al- ways easily be supposed ; as, for example, “J know,” “I believe,” “I cannot do it,” &c. Thus, Hom. Od. 10, 501, 'Q Kipxy, tic yap ratrny ddév fryepovedoer; ‘* Oh Circe (I cannot go thither), for who will guide me on this way?’ By the frequency of this kind of interrogative use, it gradually lost its proper force, and came to be employed simply to strengthen a question, like the Latin nam in qutsnam. 2. In such expressions as xai ydp, dAAa yap, &c., the former particle indicates an omission of something, for which ydp assigns a cause ; and hence «ai ydép, when closely translated, means, ‘‘ and (no wonder,) for,” ‘Sand (this was natural,) for,” &c. So in dada ydp, we must say, when rendering literally, “ but (this was tmpossible,) for,” ‘ but (this happened otherwise,) for,” &c. The context will always, of course, suggest the proper ellipsis. TE. 1. Te, an enclitic particle, emphatically heightens the word which it follows above the rest of the clause, and thus strengthens the idea of the same. It is frequently joined to pronouns, particularly personal ones ; as, Eywye, “I, at least,” “I, for my part.” It is often, too, put in com- bination with other particles, from which it usually stands separated by one or more words; as, ye 67, “really,” “certainly ;” yé tot, “ at least,” “‘ however.” 2. Generally, also, ye is used in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm or restrict ; and likewise in exhortations, to render them more impressive. But in English it often happens that the sense of ye, in its various combinations, can only be indicated by heightening the tone of the word to which it refers. * CONJUNCTIONS, ; 205 SE. 1. The particle dé is always placed after one or more words in a ‘clause, and properly signifies “ dut,’”’ both as distinguishing and opposing. Very often, however, it serves to mark a transition from une proposition to another; and, generally speaking, every proposition which has no other conjunction at its commencement takes this dé, whether it be re- . ally opposed to the preceding or not, particularly in enumerations. Ii such cases, therefore, it generally remains untranslated in English. In” the ancient form of the language, especially in Homer, it often stands for “and ;” and it is also used on some occasions, in the old poets, to ex- : plain what goes before, in which cases it answers to ydp, ‘‘ for.” ~ 2. The principal use of dé, however, is its opposition to wév. The opposition in which one member of a sentence stands to another can be stronger or slighter. The Greeks in both cases use yév and dé for con- nexion ; but in English we can only employ the particles ‘‘ indeed’ and ‘* but” to designate the stronger opposition ; and hence we are often de- | ficient in definite expressions for the Greek péy and dé, which we then translate sometimes by “‘ and,’’ “ also ;”’ sometimes by “ partly—partly,” “as well—as also,” &c. 3. When séy is put in the first member of a sentence, the thought necessarily turns to an opposite member with dé. Several cases never- ~ theless occur where, with pév preceding, the expected dé does not actu- ally occur. Namely, either (1.) the antithesis to the member formed with uév expressly exists, but declares itself so’clearly by the position and subject that dé can be omitted. This is chiefly the case when tem- poral and local adverbs are used, which stand in a natural opposition be- tween themselves ; as, évrava and éxei, mpOrov and émecra, &c. Or (2.) the antithesis lies only in the mind, but i is not expressly assigned in the discourse. This is chiefly the case when personal and demonstrative pronouns are used at the beginning of a proposition, in combination with pév; as, yo pév mpogpnuat, “I have formed the resolution” (another probably not). Kat radra pév 67 rocaira, ‘ These things are so circum- stanced” (but others differently). Or (3.) the antithesis is ipdicated by another particle ; as, GAAd, atrdp, atre, &c. "H. 1. The primary use of # is disjunctive, and its sense is “or.” Next to its disjunctive use is that connected with doubt or deliberation, where it has the meaning of “ whether—or ;” as, wepunpisev 2 bye ’Arpeldny bvapi£o., 2 yéAov matoeev. “ He pondered whether he should slay _ Atrides or calm his wrath.” ta we . 196 ADVERBS. obpavovec . e e es e e e e t he e otpavéce sli Onb6ale « «. . ws se sto Thebes. A@jvate . . . «. . © © « to Athens. 4. Adverbs are also formed from substantives by an nexing the syllables déy and cori, and those thus produced express comparison ; as, Borpvd6r, “clus- ter-wise ;” kuvnddv, “after the manner of dogs ;” "EAAnuoti, “after the manner of the Greeks ;” avdpioté, “ after the manner of men.” 5. Adverbs derived from substantives sometimes end in ddéjv, and then denote that something takes place by the application of the idea which is con- tained in the substantive; as, Aoyddny (from A6- yoc), “ by selection ;” duborAddny (from dvabodAn), “ by delay.” : 6. Adverbs are also formed from verbs, and have the ter- Mination in dnv, which termination is annexed immediate- ly to the root. axe vinny Zev¢o Kpovidne kai ’Ar6AAwY, “ for unto thee has Jove, the son of Saturn, given victory, and Apollo.” 9. Sometimes a nominative is put without a verb follow- ing, and is then called the nominative absolute ; as, éxetvos dé elocAG6vrec, elnev 6 Kpitiac, “ they having entered, Crit- tas said.” e THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 1. An adjective is often put in the neuter gender, with- out regard to the gender of the substantive which stands with it in the sentence, ypjua being understood, and re- mains in the singular even when the substantive is in the plural ;' as, ovx dyabov 7 troAvKolpavia, “ the government of the many is not a good thing ;” petabodai eloi Avrrnpdy, “‘ changes are a sad thing.” 2. An adjective of the masculine gender is often found with a feminine noun of the dual number, and under this rule are also included the pronoun, participle, and article ;* as, dup® TovUTW TA TOA, “ both these cities ;"’ dbo yuvaixe épivovre, “ two women quarrelling ;” TO yeipe, “ the two hands.” 3. An adjective is often put ina different gender from the substantive with which it stands, as referring to the person or persons implied by that substantive ;° as, pide téxvov, “ dear child” (Il. 22, 84), spoken of Hector; téxog | dtputavn, “ indefatigable offspring” (Il. 2, 157), spoken of Minerva. 4. Hence a collective noun in the singular number, and of the feminine or neuter gender, is often accompanied by the adjective jn the plural and masculine; as, Eyouey ri 1. In all such constructions as these, the substantive is regarded by the mind as representing merely some general class of things, and bende the adjective is put in the neuter gender. 2. Hence it has been inferred that the dual of the adjective, pronoun, iat ae and article had originally only one form, namely, the mascu- "3. Grammarians call this synesis (cvveots), i. @., an understanding of the person implied by the eng i 234 2 PRONOUNS. EAAny innpectay trAelove wai dpuelvove, “we have the rest of the crews more numerous and skilful.” 5. Among the tragic writers, when a woman speaks of herself in the plural number, she uses the masculine ; and the masculine is also employed when a chorus of women are speaking of themselves. Thus, ol 1po@vfjoKxovres (Eurip.), where Alcestis speaks of herself; @xretp’ dxovoac (Eurip. Androm.), ‘I pitied, on having heard,” where the chorus speak. 6. A substantive is often used as an adjective ;' as, yAdo- cay ‘EAAdda édidate, “ he taught the Greek tongue.” 7. The substantive is often changed into a genitive plu- ral ;? as, of ypnorot TOY dvOpurwy, “ the worthy ones among men,” for of ypnorot &vOpwrot, “ worthy men.” 8. This construction takes place also in the singular, es- pecially in Attic ; as, r7v tAelotny th¢ orpatiac (Thucyd.), “the greatest part of the army ;” tov moAvv Tov xpévov, “@ great part of the time.” 9. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substan- tive, governs the genitive ; as, uéoov juépac, “ the middle of the day ;” récov dpirov, “ so great a throng.” 10. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter singular and plural, with and without an article, for adverbs; as, mparorv, “in the first place ;” Td mpwrov, “ at first ;” Kpv- gaia, “ secretly ;” dadpa, “ cheerfully.” PRONOUNS. 1. The noun to which the relative refers is often omitted in the antecedent proposition, and joined to the relative in the same case with it; as, ovré¢ éoriv, bv eldeg dvdpa, “‘ this ts the man whom you saw ;” ov yw, OTIM TMLOTEvOAL dy dvvaipny diay, “I have no friend on whom I might rely.” 1. This is of very ordinary occurrence in our own language ; as, sea- water, house-dog, &c. Bis pe a Lee substantive is here considered as a whole, and the adjective as a part. PRONOUNS. 235 2. The relative often agrees with its antecedent in case, by what is called attraction ; as, ody toi¢ noavpoic, ole 6 natnp KatéAirev, “ with the treasures which his father left behind ;” dywyv dnd tév méAEwr, Gv Enetce, oTparidy, “‘leading a body of troops from the cities which he had per- suaded.” . 2 3. If, in this attraction, the word to which the relative refers be a demonstrative pronoun, this pronoun is generally omitted, and the relative takes its case; a8, ody ol¢ pdA- tora didcic, “with those whom you most love,” for odv Tov- tote ob¢ pddAsora gideic. 4. Sometimes the antecedent takes the case of the rela- tive ; as, GAAov ob« olda, ov dv rebyea diw, “I know not any other whose arms I may put on.” 5. The nominative of the personal pronoun is usually omitted with the personal terminations of verbs, as in Latin, except where there is an emphasis; as, dAAd mdv- Tuc Kal od drpet avrihy, “ but you, by all means, shall even see her.” 6. The possessive pronouns are only employed when an emphasis is required; in all other cases the personal pro- nouns are used in their stead; as, 7aT7p 7uar, “ our fa- ther” (literally, “the father of us”); but marnp juérepoc, “‘ our own father.” 7. A substantive is sometimes put in the genitive, as in apposition with another genitive implied in a possessive pronoun ;' as, éxxdpere xopag tév ye adv dpOadudy tov mptabewe, “ may a raven strike out the eye of you the ambas- sador.” 8. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objec- tively ;* as, ad¢ 1600¢, not “thy regret,” but “ regret for 1. So in Latin, mea ipsius causa, where ipsius is in apposition with the genitive implied in mea. So, also, nomen meum , mealkpra- sentis preces” (Cic. Planc. 10, 26). 2. This is called by the older grammarians the passive use of the pos- sessive. Consult Ruddiman, Instit. G. L. ed. Stalld. vol. ii., p. 50. 236 THE GENITIVE. thee; tduad vovberjuata, “ the lessons which thou givest me.” a 9. The pronoun a’réc is often used after ordinal num- bers, to show that one person with several others, whose number is less by one than the number mentioned, has done something ; as, KoprvOiwy orparrydo qv Hevondeldne, néprrroc avTéc¢, “ Xenoclides was leader of the Corinthians along with four others.” - 10. The demonstrative pronouns ovro¢ and éde are gen- erally distinguished in this way, that ovroc refers to what immediately precedes, and éde to -what immediately fol- lows. Thus, .réupaca 1) Téuvpig xnpvea Edeye tdde, “© Tomyris, having sent a herald, announced as follows ;” tavta dé dKkovoac ele, “having heard these things, he said.” 11. The demonstrative pronouns are often used instead of the adverbs “here” and “ there ;” as, GAA’ 70’ éadar éx douew Epyerat, “ but here comes a maidservant out of the mansion ;” avtTat yap, avtat tAnotov SpwoKovoi pov, “ for there, there, they are leaping near me.” 12. The reflexive pronoun éavrov is sometimes used for the other reflexive pronouns of the first and second per- sons ;' as, det muacg dvepécOar EavTovc, “it behooves us to ask our own selves ;” el 0” érnripwe udpov Tov atti olaGa, “but if you truly know your own fate.” THE GENITIVE. 1. The verbs elus and yiyvowat, denoting possession, property, part, or duty, require the genitive ; as, rovTo Td mredlov qv pév Tote THY Xopaocpiwy, “this same plain be- longed formerly to the Chorasmians ;” rroAAne dvoiac éort 1. Some accompanying gesture must be supposed, that may serve to express the reference of the pronoun. 2. The fundamental idea of the genitive is that of separation or ab- straction, of going forth, from, or out of anything. THE GENITIVE. 237. Onpacbar xevd, “it is the part of great folly to hunt hei vain things.” 2. The genitive is used with verbs of all kinds, even with those which govern an accusative, when the action does not refer to the whole object, but only to a part; as, énrjoa: Kpewyv, “to roast some flesh;” Ereuov ric yijc, “‘ they laid waste a part of the country ;” mapoliag rig 30- oac, “ having opened the door a little.” 3. On the general principle of reference to a part, the genitive is put with verbs that denote “ to take hold of,” “ to touch,” and also with their opposites, “ to let go,” “to loose,” é&ic.; as, EAdborvTo tH¢ Gavnc, “ they took hold of his gir- dle ;” el tic tpadv detvac BodAeras tHe éuje dypacbat, “ if any one of you wishes to touch my right hand ;” tod’ Exov- oa mautos ob peOjoopat, “ I will not willingly let go of this my child. 4. On the same principle of a part, = genitive is it with the verbs puuvjoney, “to remind ;” pepvjobat, “ to remember ;” AavOdvecbat, “to forget,” because remember- ing and forgetting refer always to particular properties and circumstances only, and therefore to parts of the whole. Thus, diAwy nai napévtwy Kal drévtwv péprynoo, “ re- member friends both when present and absent ;” obdé téte értAnjoouat avrov, “ even then I will not forget him.” 5. The genitive is also put with the verbs “to begin,” such as dpyev, adpyecOa, vrdpyery, &c., because here also the reference is only to a part, that is, the commence- ment of an action; as, dpyere ddixiac, “ begin injustice ;” innptav tic éAevOeplacg adrdoy Tq ‘EAAdd, “ they made a beginning of freedom for all Greece.” G. Verbs signifying the operations of the senses, such as “ to hear,” * to feel,” “to smell,” and the like, but not those denoting “to see,” require the genitive ;' verbs signifying 1. The genitive is put with these verbs only of the object which pro- duces the hing perceived, or of an occurrence of which we perceive only 238 THE GENITIVE. “to see” take the accusative. Thus, tavréc Baotdedc — dxovet, “a hing hears everything ;” 66@ pvpov, “ I smell of myrrh.” 7. Adverbs of place and time require the genitive, be- cause the adverb denotes a single point only, but the sub- joined definition of place and time designates the whole ; as, TavTayov yc, “ everywhere on earth ;” Owe THC Nuépac, “‘ late in the day.” 8. Time when, that is, part of time, is put in the genitive 5 as, Jépouc TE Kal yELuavoc, “ in both summer and winter.” 9. The material of which anything is made is put in the genitive, the thing made being a single object, but the sub- joined definition denoting an entire class or kind of materi- als, part of which go to compose that object; as, Tév dig- pov éroinoey loyupav tbAwy, “ he made the chariot of strong wood.” 10. The superlative degree is also followed by a geni- tive, this genitive marking the entire class, of which the superlative indicates the most prominent as a part or parts ; as, EyOtoToc TavTwr, “ most hated of all;” dptorot Tpwowr, bravest of the Trojans.” 11. Hence the genitive is put also with verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which are either derived from superlatives, or in which merely the idea of preferableness is implied ; as, ExaddoreveTro TA0@Y yuvaLK@y, “* she was the handsomest single parts. ‘The thing perceived, on the contrary, stands in the accu- sative. Hence, for the various construction of these verbs, the following rules obtain: 1. If the person alone is named, this stands in the genitive. 2. If both person and thing are named, the person stands in the genitive and the thing in the accusative ; as, rodro Zwxpdrove qxovoa. 3. If the thing alone is named, the question then is, whether this is conceived as a simple part which I comprehend with my senses, or as a compound whole of which single parts only are perceived ; in the first case the ac- cusative stands, in the second the genitive ; as, O¢ go0ero Ta yryvopueva, ‘“aohen he perceived what was taking place.” On the contrary, always aloOdavecba xpavyic, Sopibov, &c., because one can only perceive indi- cations of the noise. In like manner, dxovecy dixne, “to hear a suit ;” alobavecbat Exibovaie, “ to perceive a plot ;” but fuvievac Ta Aeyduava, ‘to comprehend or understand what is said.” THE GENITIVE. 239 of all women ;” duanpenci¢ Svntaey, “ conspicuous among mortals ;” &éywc tavTwr, “in a manner surpassing all.” 12. To words of all kinds other words are added in the genitive, which show the respect in which the sense of these words must be taken; and, in this case, the geni- tive properly signifies “with regard to,” or ‘in respect of ;” as, vAnc m@¢ 6 TéTOG Ever; “ how is the place with regard to timber ?” ovyyvauwv todv dvOpwrivey duaprnudtay, “‘ forgiving with respect to human errors ;” T6ppw Tig HAtK- éac, “ far advanced in years” (properly, “ far advanced with respect to years”). 13. Hence all words expressing ideas of relation, which are not complete without the addition of another word as the object of that relation, takg this object in the genitive : and to this rule belong in particular the adjectives ‘“‘-expe- rienced, ignorant, desirous,” and the like, as also the verbs ‘to concern one’s self, to neglect, to consider, to reflect, to be desirous,” &c. Thus, urreipoc raxoyv, “ experienced in evils ;” drraidetroc dpeTig, “ uninstructed in virtue 3" Tov Kotvov adyaBov éeripedciobat, “ to take care of the common good ;” peyddAwy érrOvpety, “ to destre great things.” - 14. Words signifying plenty or want are followed by a ' genitive, because the term,which expresses of what any- thing is full or empty,indicates the respect in which the signification of the governing word is taken; as, peortdc kanav, “full of evils ;? Epnuog piAwy, “ destitute of friends ;” trAnoOjvat véoov, “to be full of sickness ;” deia0a olxer@y, * to be in want of inhabitants.” 15. The comparative degree is followed by a genitive, because this genitive indicates the respect in which the comparative is to be taken; as, pelCwy mratpdc, “ greater than a father,” which properly means, “ greater with respect to a father.” 1. Hence appears to have arisen the rule found in eee that adjectives compounded with 4 figs? govern the genitive. B é privative cannot well determine the use of either the genitive or any other case. 4 240 THE GENITIVE. 16. All words derived from comparatives, or which in- volve a comparison, are followed by the genitive; as, 7T- tao0al ttvoc, “to be defeated by any one” (literally, “ to be less than any one”) ; verepaioc Thc wayne, “ after the bat- tle ;” rrepryévecOas tov Baotréwe, “ to prove superior to the king ;” devrepoc obdevde, “ second to no one.” 17. All verbs that are equivalent in meaning to a noun and verb, and especially those in which the idea of ruling is implied, are followed by a genitive; as, dvdocesy TOY Midway, “ to reign over the Medes” (equivalent to dvaé elvat -~av M7dwy); dpyev dvOporwy, “ to rule over men” (equiv- alent to dpywy sivas dvOparwy) ; and, in the same manner, xupesvecy for xvpioc elvat; tupavvedvety for ripayvorg elva., &c. | 18. Words indicating value or worth require the genitive ; as, Epdec TroAAdy dita, “he performs actions equivalent to those of many ;” larpd¢ roAAay dyrditoc, “a physician equal in value to many men.” 19. All verbs denoting “to buy,” ‘to sell,” “to ex- change,” &c., are followed by a genitive; as, wvovyTas Tac yuvaikac ypnudtwv TroAAwy, “ they purchase their wives for much money ;” éma@Aovy TroAAov Toig GAAotC, “they sold for a large sum to the rest.” 20. All verbs denoting “ to accuse,” “ to criminate,” &c., are followed by a genitive ;' as, ypdpouas oe dévov, “ I ac- cuse you of murder ;” diwgopat oe detAiac, “ I will prosecute you for cowardice.” 21. The genitive often stands alone in exclamations, with and without an interjection, as indicating the cause from which the feeling in question originates; as, "Q Zev Baotdev tho Aentérnroc THY ppevdy ! “ Oh supreme Jove, the acuteness of his intellect!” “ArroAAov, Tov yaopjuatos! “‘ Apollo, what a pair of jaws !” 1. The genitive here denotes the object of the action. For this same reason fvexa and vzép govern the genitive. ~ DATIVE. ~ 2A1 DATIVE.! 1. The dative stands in answer to the questions to whom or what? for whom or what? to whose advantage? to whose disadvantage? as, Edwxd cot Td BibAlov, “ I gave the book to thee ;” &rreoOE pot, © maidec, “follow me, my children ;” émiTadtT@ coe Toute, “ I enjoin this upon you ;” Yeoic dpéo- ret, ‘he pleases the gods ;” didog éxelvy, “ a friend to him ;” . ayabov Ty 7éAet, “ good for the state.” 2. Words which express the idea of approach, meetsng, union, OF connexion, a8 well as all verbs implying an action which cannot be accomplished without approach to the ob- ject, as, to associate, to speak, to eonverse, to pray, to dis- pute, to contend, to vie, to be attentive, and the like, are joined with the dative ; as, dpa sjuiy Bapbdpovc mpootdy- _ tac, “ I see barbarians approaching us ;” pn Epece Toic yor evotv, “contend not with your parents ;” ebyovtas aot Deoic, “ they pray to all the gods.” 3. Verbs to rebuke, to blame, to reproach, to envy, to be angry, take the dative of the person ; as, éuot Aovdopficerat, ‘“‘ he will reprove me ;” péupopat tole dpxyety BovAopévocc, “‘ I blame those who wish to rule ;” ob pOovette TOUT®, “ envy not this man;” th yaderaiverc TO Yepdrorte ; “ why art thou angry at the attendant ?” 4, Words implying equality, resemblance, suitableness, or the contrary, have the dative case ; as, looc toic loyv- pote, “ equal to the powerful ;” Eotxac dovAw, “ you resemble @ slave ;” dvduotog T@ rrarpl, “ unlike his father.” 5. In like manner, the dative stands also with 6 airéc, because it expresses perfect equality; as, év TQ aiTy. Kivdiva toig pavdorarotc, “in the same danger with the worst ;” totic abroig Kip@ drAotc, “ in the same arms with Cyrus.” ~ - 1. The dative serves to designate the more remote object, that is, it designates the object whieh merely participates in an operation, without being immediately affeeted by it, or in which the effeet or consequence of an action is shown. x 242 DATIVE. 6. The means by which, and the instrument with which, a thing is accomplished, are both put in the dative, since this case also serves in Greek to indicate all definitions that are mentioned incidentally and secondarily to the main object ;' as, roly dpOaduoiy dpdpev, “ we see with the two eyes ;” of rroAéuoe E6aAAov AlBotc, Kai Eraov payalpatc, “ the enemy threw with stones and struck with swords.” 7. The motive and cause are put in the dative, and hence the verbs “ to rejoice,” “to be delighted,” “ to be grieved,” é&c., govern the object by which the feeling is occasioned in the dative ; as, 66m dm7AGov, “ they departed through fear ;” cot yaipovary, “ they delight in thee ;” Avrotpeba Tovrotc, “ we are grieved by these things.” 8. The manner and way in which a thing takes place are put in the dative ; as, Big elc tiv olxiay elogABov, “ they entered into the house by force ;” mavra duerétaxto péTp kai Térw, “all things were arranged by measure and by place.” 9. The period of time at which a thing takes place, or during which a thing continues or exists, is put in the da- tive ; as, TQdE TH vuKT, “on this very night ;” tpi¢ Evixn- Gav TavTy TY NMEpG, “they conquered thrice during this same day.” 10. The verb eluf, when put for Ey, “ to have,” governs the dative ; as, dooce ovK qv dpyupoc, “as many as had not money.” 11. An impersonal verb governs the dative; as, &eoré prot arévat, ‘it is lawful for me to depart.” 12. Neuter adjectives in réov govern the person in the dative, and the thing in the case of the verb from which they are derived ; as, rovto trovnréov éort pot, “I must do this ;” rovtou érupednréov éoriv tyiv, “ you must take care of this.” 4 1. Hence the verb zpjo8ar, “to use,” “to make use of,” takes the ative. ‘ ACCUSATIVE. 248 ACCUSATIVE. 1. A verb signifying actively governs the accusative ; as, ol *EAAnvec évixnoay Tove Iépoac, “ the Greeks conquered the Persians.” 2. Other verbs also, which in Latin frequently take the object in the dative, or are connected with it by a preposi- tion, require in Greek the accusative ; such as verbs signi- fying “‘ to benefit,” “ to injure,” and, in general, all which de- note an action tending to the advantage or disadvantage of a person ;' as, wdéAqae Tove ovvdvtac, “he benefited those who associated with him ;” 6 koAakebwr tovc didove BAdr- ret, “he that flatters injures his friends ;” tynwpovytat tov¢ adixove, “ they punish the unjust.” 3. The accusative also occurs in Greek with intransitive verbs, when the object which receives the action contained in the verb is definitely assigned, as in verbs signifying “ to go,” “ to come,” “ to reach,” “to arrive at,” &c. Thus, tiv vioov adixero, “he came to the island ;” tropevecBar ddov, “< to go upon a journey.” 4. Every verb may take an accusative of a cognate noun ; as, Kivduvetow TovToy Kivdvvoy, “ I will encounter this dan- ger ;” nobévnoay trabtny dobéveray, “ they were sick with this sickness ;" érupéAovtat racav éeriédecay, “ they exer- cise all care ;” T6Aeuov TroAeunooper, “ we will wage war.” 5. Many verbs, the action of which admits of more than one object, without determining the nearest, have in Greek a double accusative, namely, the accusative of the person and the accusative of the thing. To these belong verbs signifying ‘to do good or evil to one,” “‘ to speak good or evil of one,” “to ask,” “to demand,” “ to teach,” “to put on or off,” “to take away,” “ to deprive,” *‘ to conceal,” &c. ; as, 1. The verb Avorredeiv, ‘to be of use to,” always takes the dative ; on the contrary, the occurrence of dgeAeiv with the dative is rare, and confined to the poets ; as, Soph. Antig. 558, Gore roig Savotocy dape- Asiv. 244 ACCUSATIVE. Kaka ToAAG Eopye Tpwac, “ he has done many evils to the Trojans ;” dya0a elev abrove, “he said good things of them ;” elpero Grayvrac roy traida, “he asked all about his son ;” tovo pabnrdac édidake owdpoovvny, “he taught his disciples continence.” ; 6. Verbs governing two accusatives in the active retain one in the passive, namely, the accusative of the thing ; as, okitrpoyv Tysdc Te dtroovAdTat, “ he 1s despoiled of his scep- tre and honours ;” érratdevOn povotkny Kal pnropiany, “ he was taught music and rhetoric.” 7. When, in addition to the whole object, which receives the action of the verb, particular specification is also made of a part, in which this action is principally shown, both the whole and part stand, especially with the poets, as proximate objects in the accusative ; as, piv lévra BdAe o7T7Ooc, “he wounded him, as he came on, tn the breast ;” tp6- po¢g UmAGE yvia Exaorov, “ trembling came upon each one tn his limbs beneath.” 8. Since the accusative serves always to designate the object upon which an action immediately passes, it fre- quently stands also with intransitive verbs and adjectives containing a general expression, and indicates the part or more definite object to which this expression must be prin- cipally referred. This is called the accusative of nearer definition, and is to be expressed in English by different prepositions, especially by in, as to, with respect to.' Thus, tov ddxtvAoy dAye tovroy, “I feel a pain in this finger ;’ médac wKde ’AxtAdcic, “ Achilles swift as to his feet ;” X0- poo qv tiv matplda, “he was a Syrian as to his native country ;" 16 dévdpoy TnevtiKkovta today tote Td thor, “ the tree is fifty feet in height.” 9. Time how long is put in the accusative ; as, S0ov yp6- vov dv rréAeuoc q, “ for as long a time as there may be war ;” 1. It is generally assumed that xard, or some other preposition, is un- derstood in such constructions, but this is not correct. VERBS PASSIVE. ' 245 Kai yOéc dé nai tpirnv juépay +d avTd TtovTo Enparroy, * they an this same thing during both yesterday and the day previous.” 10. Distance and space are put in the accusative ; ; as, arévet 6xT® juspOv bdov ard Babvacvoc, “ it is distant a journey of eight days from Babylon.” ; VERBS PASSIVE. 1. Verbs of a passive signification are followed in Greek by a genitive, governed by 76, dé, éx, mapd, or Tpdc ; as, 6 vov¢g id olvov dtapOelperat, “ the understanding is impaired by wine ;” GAdat yvdpa dd’ ixdotrwy éréyovro, “‘ other opinions were expressed by each.” 2. The dative, however, is sometimes employed by the poets instead of the genitive; as, "AyAARi éddun, “ he was subdued by Achilles.” 3. The dative is very frequently put with the perfect passive of verbs, whose perfect active is not much used ; as, TavTa AéAexrat piv, “ these things have been said by us,” for A€Aoya TavTa. INFINITIVE. . 1. The infinitive mood is used to express the cause or end of an action ; as, 3éAw dderv, “ I wish to sing.” 2. The infinitive, with the neuter of the article prefixed, is used as a species of verbal noun ; and very frequently the article is thus appended to an entire clause, of which the infinitive forms a part; as, TO Avevy, “ the loosening ;” 70 Every yphuara, ‘ the having money.” : : 8. The infinitive in Greek is governed by adjectives, and denotes the respect in which the idea of the adjective is to be applied ;' as, lxavol répreyv gatvovrat, “ they ap- pear calculated to delight ;” ob detvd¢ gore Aéyetv, GAX’ dd- 1. This is imitated in Latin by the poets; as, idoneus delectare, utilis facere. In prose, however, the gerund with a a Toust he em- ployed; as, wdoneus ad delectandu x m, &c. 2 246 INFINITIVE. tvarog ovyGy, “ he is not able in speaking, but unable to keep silent.” | 4. The infinitive is used with @ore, more rarely with we, to express the’ consequence of an event indicated by the leading verb ; as, dsAotimétaroc iv 0 Kipoc, Sore névTa troueivae tov énatveicOas Evexa, “ Cyrus was very ambi- tious, so as to endure all things for the sake of being praised.” 5. The infinitive is frequently used, in short intermediate propositions, sometimes with, sometimes without we, to in- dicate an aim, or else to qualify what precedes; as, we Enog elrreiv, “ so to speak;” arAwe elreiv, “ to speak plain- ly ;” Scov éué eldévat, “as far as I know;” éuot doxety, ‘Sas appears to me.” 6. The nominative, and not the accusative, is put with the infinitive whenever the reference is to the same per- son that forms the subject of the leading verb ;' as, pac- rev elvat Alég vidc, “he said he was the son of Jupiter ;” Eretoa abrove elvat Sedc, “ I persuaded them that I was a god.” 7. The genitive and dative sometimes follow the infini- tive by a species of attraction; as, édéovTo aitov elvas mpoOvjov, “ they besought him to be zealous ;” dd¢ pot dav- jvat dé, * grant unto me to appear worthy.” 8. The infinitive elva:, with and without an article, is put absolutely with adjectives, adverbs, or prepositions, with their case; as, éx@y elvaz, “ willingly ;” rd otunay elvat, “ generally ;” Td pév Thwepov elvat, “ to-day at least ;” TO KaTa TovTo elvat, “ with respect to this.” 9. The infinitive is frequently put for the imperative, particularly in the poets ;? as, Sapody viv, Acéundes, éni Tpwecot udyeobar, ‘ taking courage, now, oh Diomede, fight 1. The accusative, however, is joined with such infinitives whenever emphasis is required; as, Kpotcoc évouile éwirév elvar révrwv bAbtO- ratov, ** Cresus thought that he himself was the happiest of all men” (Herod. 1, 34). 2. Some understand, but without any necessity, an ellipsis of some verb, such as Spa or dé¢, in such constructions. PARTICIPLE. RAY against the Trojans ;” ddoxery Muivac dépay, “ say that thou seest Mycene.” 10. The infinitive of the present, future, and aorists, but more particularly of the future, when preceded by the verb péAAw, expresses the future, and answers to the future par- ticiple active in Latin with the verb sum; as, uéAAw ypd- getv, “I am about to write” (scripturus sum); pweAAfow yeddety, “ I will be about to write” (scripturus ero); éuéd- Anoa ypadev, “ I was about to write” (scripturus fui). ° PARTICIPLE. 1. The participle is put after a verb, and in the nomina- tive case, when the reference is to some state as existing at the time on the part of the subject, or to some action as being performed by it." Thus, olda 8vnric dv, “I know that I am a mortal ;” paiverat 6 vouoc jude BAdrTwY, “ the law appears to be injuring us ;” mavoacbe ddtxovrtec, “ cease acting wrongfully.” 2. If, however, the subject belonging to the participle stands with the principal verb as a proximate object in the accusative, the participle also stands in the accusative ; as, of ’AOnvaio: Exavaay avTov orparnyovrra, “ the Athenians caused him to cease being a@ commander ;” ovc¢ dv dpe ta ayaa trovovvrac, “ whomsoever I may see doing the things that are good.” 3. If the subject belonging to the participle stands with the principal verb as the remote object in the genitive or dative, the participle, in like manner, takes the genitive or dative ;* as, goOdunv abt olopévwy elvat copwratwy, “ I perceived that they fancied themselves very wise ;” ovdérote 1. This again is a species of attraction, and proceeds, as in other cases, from the circumstance of a dependant proposition having no sub- ject of its own. 2. When a reflexive pronoun stands with the verb, the participle can be put in either of two cases, according as it is referred to the subject contained in the verb or pronoun; as, cvvowda éuavt@ codde dy, I am conscious to myself of being wise ;” cavT@ cuvgdcig ddixodyri, “ you were conscious to yourself of acting wrongfully.” 248 PARTICIPLE. peTreuéAnoé pot ovynoarytt, “I never repented of having been silent.” . 4. The verb “ to be ashamed” takes the participle when the action of which one is ashamed is performed ; the in- finitive when the action is declined through shame ; as, aloyivowa trrotjnoac, “ I am ashamed to have done tt ;” alo- xbvopat EpecOat, “ I am ashamed to ask.” 5. The verbs “ to commence,” “ to begin,” take the parti- ciple when the assigned state has already begun to take place ; the infinitive when it is just about to take place ;. as, & yepov jpgaro yevdouevoc, “ the winter was come on ;” 6 XEluayv Toveto ylyveoban, “ the winter was beginning to come on” (i. e., it approached, but was not yet arrived). 6. The verbs “to hear” and “ to learn” take the parti- ciple when a fact is adduced which we perceive with our own ears ; the infinitive when something is assigned which we hear from the narration of others; as, #xovoa Tov An- poobévn Aéyorra, “ I heard Demosthenes speak ;” dnovw tov Anpoobevn Acyety, “ I hear (i. e., 1am told) that Demosthe- nes says.” 7. The verb ¢aivecOat takes the participle in the signi- fication “to be evident,” “to be manifest ?’ but the infinitive in the signification ‘‘ to seem,” “‘ to have the appearance ;” as, Epaiveto KAaiety, “he was just as though he wept ;” é¢- alveto KAaiwy, “ he evidently wept.” 8. Verbs signifying “to declare,” “to announce,” * to show,” take the participle when something is announced or shown as a fact; but the infinitive when it is assigned that something may or is said to be. Thus, dm7yyéAAero Toridara rodcopkovpévn, “ Potidea was announced to bein a state of siege” (when it is certain that it is besieged) ; dr- nyyéAAeto Wotidara trodtopKetobar, Potidea was reported to be in a state of siege” (when intelligence is given merely resting on report). 9. To some verbs which merely express subordinate PARTICIPLE. 249 definitions of an action, the Greeks add the participle of the verb which expresses the principal action. Such verbs are TVYXG¥W, AavOdvw, POdrw, dtatedéw, &c., which, in translation, are sometimes rendered by adverbs.’ Thus, Ervyov trapévtec, “ they chanced to be present ;” EXabev ev- spyereiy, “he conferred kindnesses secretly ;” pOdver TOLWy, “‘ he does tt before another ;” dtarerédena gevywr, “ I have always avoided.” 10. The participle in intermediate propositions is either explanatory, and is then expressed by the relative whe, which ; or, 2. it denotes relations of time, and is expressed by the English particles when, while, after, &c.; or, 3. it denotes relations of cause, like the particles because, since, as; or, 4. it expresses condition, like the particles #f, al- though. Thus, yaderby tore Aéyery mpdc yaorépa, dra via Exovoay, “it is a difficult thing to speak to a stomach which has no ears ;” ddbvarov ToAAa Texvapevoy dvOpwrrov ndvrTa Kade trolety, “ it is impossible for a man when try- ing many things to do all well ;” ddixet Lwxpdrnc ov voul- Cav Seove elvar, “ Socrates violates the laws, because he does . not think that there are any gods ;” dévdpa pév tunbévta Trayéwe pberat, “trees, although lopped of their branches, quickly grow again.” 11. A participle and verb are to be translated as two verbs with the copulative conjunction ; as, T7v olxiay mpi- duevoc drnAde, “ he bought the house and departed.” 12. A participle, with a substantive, &c., whose case depends on no other word, is put in the genttive absolute ;* 1. With a participle ae signifies forte ; AavOdve, clam or tmpru- dens ; and ¢6évu, pre. e€ primitive meaning of ¢0dvw is “ to get be- forehand,” “to get the start of.” The verb rvyyavw is often used in the manner indicated by the rule, when it is impossible to be expressed in translation. For the Greeks, in order to designate the absence of hu- man intention and will, very frequently join it with those verbs also which, without it, express a mere occurrence of nature or of chance; as, Ervye Sava, “ he was dead ;”” rvyxdavovowy Exovrec, “ they have.” 2. If a longer historical period is to be assigned by this genitive, the preposition ézi is usually added ; as, éxi Kupov BaotAetovroc, “ under the reign of Cyrus,” i. e., as long as Cyrus reigned. 250 PARTICIPLE. as, éxe(vov eltréyroc, ndvrec éolywr, “he having spoken, all were silent.” : 13. As: the dative also is frequently used in Greek for definitions of time, and to assign the cause, datives absolute also occur, though much more rarely than the genitive ;' as, TeptidvTe TH EviavT@, “as the year came to a close ;” elpyduevoig abroic Tyg Sadacone, “ they being cut off from the sea.” 14. Accusatives absolute stand in Greek only in those cases where, in relating another’s actions, the narrator as- signs by conjecture the motive which influenced the agent. The participle is then accompanied by the particles ac, are, Oorep, or wc Gy, and the use of the accusative must be explained elliptically, as dependant upon a verb “ to suppose,” “ to believe,” “ to imagine,” which is indicated in the particles Oc, &c.; as, nixyero mpd¢ Tove Yeovo aTrAde tayaba didévat, wc Tode Beodc ndAALoTA Eldérac, Srrota dyabd éoriv, “he prayed the gods simply to give him the things that were good, since (in his belief) the gods know best what things are good.” 15. If inan intermediate proposition one of the relations, . which are otherwise designated by genitives absolute, is to be expressed by the participle of an impersonal verb, this. participle then stands in its absolute form, as a nominative absolute.? Thus, dvd ti péverc, éfov amévar ; “ why do you remain, when tt 1s allowed you to depart?” 6 8 éud¢ Trai¢ Baawy, obdév déov, katabdAAe Tov dpKrov, “ but my son, having thrown, what ought not to have been done, strikes down the boar.” 1, Care must, however, be taken not to consider passages of ancient authors as proofs of this usage, where the dative can by any means be explained in a dependant sense. 2. The nominative absolute is also used in impersonal phrases formed with éori and a neuter adjective, where a participial construction enters ; as, dixacoy dv, “it being just ;” dadivartov dv, “as it is impossible,” PROSODY. 251 PROSODY! 1. Prosopy (7poowdia), in its common acceptation at the present day, treats of the quantity of syllables, or the time occupied in pronouncing them. 2. In the ancient grammarians, 7poowdia applies also to accent and breathings. 3. The vowels « and o are short by nature; 7n and w are long by nature; and a, t, v, are termed doubiful. 4. When a vowel is said to be short by nature, the mean- ing is, that it is short by its natural pronunciation, being equivalent merely to one short time. On the other hand, a vowel long by nature is long by its natural pronunciation, being equal to two short times. ‘Thus 7 is equivalent to ee, and to oo. 5. Hence it follows, that the short vowel « has 7 for its corresponding long one; and the short vowel 0, in like manner, has w for its long. But in the case of a, t, v, there is no distinct mark or letter by which the eye can tell at - the instant whether these vowels are long or short, and hence they are called doubéful. 6. It must be carefully borne in mind, bawe that, by actual usage, every syllable in any particular case always has a definite quantity, either long or short; and that, when we speak of doubtful syllables, we do not mean that they have anything doubtful in their nature, or wavering between long and short as regards the same word ; but only that they have no corresponding long or short marks by which the eye can detect their quantity at a glance. 1. For a more enlarged view of this subject, consult the author’s larger work on Greek Prosody “252 POSITION. 7. The quantity of syllables is determined by various methods : I, POSITION. 1. A short or doubtful vowel before two consonants or a double letter is almost always long; as, oTEAA@, Oppa, ay- Tayw, Tpdrala, dpata, dirpa. 2. These two consonants may belong tothe same word with the vowel ; as, Eo7repo¢, or one of them may belong to the same word, and the other to the succeeding word ; as, TOY ducer ye, Ved Siyatép Arde, or both may be found at the beginning of the following word ; as, dvdpa dvyriv Eovra. 3. In scanning the dramatic writers, the fellowing excep- tions to this rule of position must be carefully noted. I. A short vowel before a soft mute (7, «, 7), or an as- pirate (¢, x, 9) followed by a liquid, is much rather left short than lengthened by the Attic poets. II. A short vowel before a middle mute (8, y, 6), followed by p, is short in the comic writers, but in tragedy is mostly long. III. A short vowel before a middle mute, followed by any liquid except p, is almost always long. In Eurip- ides such syllables are always long; but in Avschylus, Sophocles, and Aristophanes, they are sometimes short. IV. The tragic writers occasionally leave a vowel short before the two liquids py. ‘ 4. The epic writers, such as Homer, &c., mostly avoid the shortening of syllables before a mute and liquid, and employ it chiefly when the word cannot in any other man- ner be adapted to the measure. Thus, in the case of such forms as ZdkvvOoc, ZéAeca, Enduavdpoc, onérapvoy, &c., a preceding short vowel in another word remains short, not- withstanding the double consonant Z and the two mutes ox following immediately after. ONE VOWEL -BVEFORE ANOTHER. . 2538 II. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 1. One vowel before another or before‘a diphthong is generally short, unless lengthened by poetic license or - some other peculiar cause ; as, dyAdéc, hépioc. 2. But the Greek poets, especially the epic, often lengthen vowels, even when another follows, by the aid of the arsis ; and this takes place not only in doubtful vowels, but also in those which are naturally short. | 3. By arsis, which is called by some cesura, is meant the stress of the voice that is brought to bear upon a particular syllable in each foot during the reciting of a line. In the dactyl it falls on the first syllable; in the iambus on the last ; and in the trochee again on the first; its place being regulated by the long syllable. 4. The spondee leaves the place of the arsis undeter- mined ; and this becomes settled only by the nature of the verse in which the spondee is employed. Thus, in dactylic and trochaic measure, the arsis falls on the first syllable of the spondee ; but in iambic on the last. 5. The following are instances of lengthening by arsis. Thus, dte¢ (Od. 9, 425) ; kata Aindpny (Il. 6, 64); dé pe- Ainv (Ll. 20, 322), &c. 6. In the epic writers, long vowels and diphthongs are mostly short at the end of words when the next word be- gins with a vowel;' as, quévy év BévOeooy (Il. 1, 358) dupe duac (Ib. 23) ; dexOat &rova (Ib. 57). 7. On the contrary, the long vowel retains its natural 1. The principle on which this depends is easily explained. The 9 in #évn, for example, is equal to ee, and one of these epsilons being supposed to be elided before the initial vowel of the following word, the other epsilon remains, of course, short by nature. In other words, the fitl vowel of #uévn loses, as it were, a portion of its natural length by the sinking of the voice and by the vowel immediately ete it. So the w m dudw is equivalent to two omicrons, one of which it loseg»be- fore the following vowel, while the other remains short. In like man- ner, the diphthong az in dex@ax is supposed to lose a vowel. ~ 254 DIALECT. measure when it falls in the arsis of the foot. The follow- ing Homeric verse contains examples of both kinds.' | ‘Hyuerépe ivi olxg, dv "Apyei, rgA0e xatpyc. (il. 1, 30.) IH. CONTRACTION. 1. All contracted syllables are long ; as, tpé¢ for lepdc ; bdic for Sduec, &c. 2. Two vowels forming two syllables are frequently con- tracted into one in poetry ; as in ypvoéw (Il. 1, 15), where ew forms a single syllable. ‘This is frequent in the dra- matic writers, where the syllables are in different words, and is called synizesis ; as, 7 eldévat (Hippol. 1331), where the 7 and e are to be pronounced as one syllable; 7 ev- yévecav (Eurip. Electr. 1104). IV. DIALECT. : 1. The Doric a is long ; as, ddua, yuva, Alveia@. And so is the a in the uncontracted form ao of the genitive ; as, ’Atpelddo. 2. The Molic a is short ; as, viupd, trouprd, Kowyra. 3. In the Ionic dialect a is generally short in the penult of the perfect tenses, such as yeyda ; and always short in the third person plural of the passive in dtas and dro ; as, Edtat, dedunaro. 4. The Ionic third person plural in aoz is always long ; as, dot, TLOEaot. 5. The lonic writers double. the o and some other con- sonants at pleasure ; a license which the Attic poets never ; 1. Here, after one of the vowels has been supposed to be elided, and a single short vowel remains, this latter, being in the arsis of the foot, receives the stress of the voice, and becomes ong again. Thus, in the foot po Evi, the syllable pq is in the arsis, and hence, though one of the omicrons composing the omega is supposed to be cut off before the ini- tial vowel of évi, and only a single omicron remains, that omicron is nev- ertheless lengthened by the stress of the voice falling upon it. On the other hand, in the foot oixé &, the omega is not in the arsis, and hence, after this vowel has lost one of its component omicrons before the next word, there is no stress of the voice upon the other omicron, and there- fore it remains short. COMPOSITION. : 255 used, either in tragedy or comedy. Thus, in Homer, we have or7Gecotv for orAOeotv ; dtmdérepog for émrétepoc, &c. V. DERIVATION. 1. Derivatives for the most part follow the quantity of the words from which they are derived; as, vicdw from vikn; tiudw from tty. 2. But many derivatives from verbs differ in quantity from the present tenses of these verbs, as being immediate- ly formed from the perfect passive, with a short penult. Thus, xpirn¢ and xpiocc, though the verb be xpivw, because they are immediately formed from xéxperaz, xéxpioat.' Vi. COMPOSITION. Compoond words generally follow the quantity of their primitives ; as, dtiuoc from tif ; a a from pvc, gen. pvoc and rapwr. 2. ‘The privative a is commonly ani as, depy6c, déxwy, a8vpoc, but dBdavaroc and Gxduatocg are excepted, and, on account of the number of short syllables that follow, and which would make the words otherwise difficult*to employ. in verse, have the initial a always long. 3. ‘The particles da, ¢a, apt, ept, and’ dvc, are short; ag, dddpotvdc, CaBe0c, apideixeroc, Epixvdjc, Svoahe. VII. INCREASE OF NOUNS. 1. A in the increment of nouns.is generally short; as, OGpua, droog ; KpEac, Gtog ; véxTap, Gpoc; péAay, dvoc, &c. Exceptions. 1. All increments in avo¢ are long except slides and 4 péAdvoc ; as, Titdy, Gvoc; Idv, avoc. 1. In the same way, diarpi6a, from dérpibov, the second aorist of Starpibw ; and wapaypiy7, from mapEyT zor, the second aorist of sapa- pixe. @ 256 INCREASE OF NOUNS. 2. Allincrements in axoc, from nominatives in ag pure, are long; as, olat, Gxoc ; piat, adxoc ; pAvak, dxoc, Kc. 3. A is long in the dative plural of nouns, &c., that have a long penult in the genitive singular; as, yiyas, av- T0¢, Got; Tinpac, avroc, dot, &c. But those that are syncopated in the singular have the a short ; as, dv- dpdot, ratpao., &c. 2. Lis short in the increment of neuter nouns ; as, “éA4, troc; and in masculines and feminines which have the genitive in soc, edoc, or “Toc; as, OAL, toc ; Epec, tdog ; xapic, iroc. But dic, Badrbic, capic, kvnuic, oppayic, and several others, are excepted. 3. Lis long in the increment of masculine and feminine nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; as, deAdic or deAdiv, tvoc ; axtic or dxriv, tvoc. 4. I is also long in the increment of monosyllables ; as, Div, Sivoc ; ic, tvdg; Alc, Atté¢; excepting, however, ric, tivoc ; and A(lc, Aidéc. 5. [is also long in nouns in é¢, (O0¢ ; ty, imrog ; t&, tyog; and cé, txoc; as, dpc, iOo¢; tér7ié, tyoc ; pdoree, tyo¢ (‘‘a lash”); poivé, txog. Homer, however, has Opjixes always short. 6. But ¢ is generally short in nouns in sp, i6oc; and 2é, ixo¢ ; as, yépviy, tboc; Iplé, tpixoc ; paotes, tyoc, “a gum.” 7. Y is short in the increment of monosyllables in ve, voc; as, dpuc, dpvd¢ ; pvc, pvdc. 8. YT is also short in the increment of neuters in v; as, daxpu, voc ; and in the increment of masculines and femi- nines in v¢ and wp; as, véxuc, voc; lAdc, lAdoc ; lyOic, lyGvoc¢ ; and also in the neuter noun 7vp, tupdéc. But da- dv¢, vdd¢ and Kwuv¢, VOoc, must be excepted. 9. Y is generally short in the increment of nouns in vé and vp; as, dvus, byoc; XdAvyp, vboc; except doidvé, dKOG ; KOKKVE, Vyoc ; KNpvE, VKOC; KAVE, DKOC; yinb, drOC ; ypoy, vrroc ; while Bé6pvé has either vxoc or vxoc: INCREASE OF VERBS. 957 10. Nouns of two terminations, in v¢ and vy, have v long in the increment; as, Pépxve, or Pépkvy, vvoc. VIII. INCREASE OF VERBS. 1. The quantity of the penult in the present and imper- ' fect remains the same through all the voices and moods; as, Kpiva, Expivov, Kplve, Kptvoiul, KpLVvo, kpivety, kpivwy, Kpt- vouat, Expivduny, Kpivov, &c. 2. Most tenses have the same quantity in the penult as those from which they are formed ; as, érirov, TUG, érv- WHY, TonHoomas, TETUTIA, ETETUTELY. 3. Verbs in d6w, (w, and #6, are made short in the fu- ture ; as, dpndlw, dow; vouitw, tow; KAivw, Kddow. 4. Verbs in dw, where dw is preceded by a vowel, and all verbs in pdw, have the penult of the future long ; as, édw, Edow ; dpdw, Gow; dpdw, Gow. 5. Verbs in dw, when preceded by a consonant other than p, have the penult of the future short ; as, omdw, dow; YEAGwW, dow. 6. Liquid verbs, or those ending in Aw, po, vw, po, shorten the penult of the future, but in the first aorist active they invariably take either a long vowel or a diphthong ; as, BdAAw, 9AGAG, EOnAa; TEAAW, TEAGD, ETA; palvw, Par, Epnva ; dapSiva, dapOvva, eddpbiva. 7. Verbs in fw, not proceeding from roots in ¢w, are made long in the future ; as, KvAiw, low; Koviw, tow. But éo0iw has the z everywhere short. 8. Dissyllabic verbs in dw are for the most part long in the future and aorists ; as, dtw, dvow, Edvoa ; TPvW, TPVOW, Etpvea. Except rrvw, rrvow, Errioa ; K0W, kvow, Exvoa ; and one or two others. _ 9. Polysyllabic verbs in tw, in the same manner, are for the most part long in the penult of the future and aorist ; as, loyiw, loxiow, loyioa ; daxpiw, daxpiga, sian ates ¥ 2 | ~~ 258: INCREASE OF VERBS. 10. But polysyllables in jw are for the most part short ; as, dvvw, dvicw ; apvw, dpiow ; agiw, advow. 11. Verbs in vw, which have lengthened forms in vp, for the most part shorten the doubtful vowel ; as, deuxvvu, édeixviov ; pyviw, éulyviov. The verbs gw and divw are not exceptions to this rule, since they do not furnish complete forms in vp, but only in the second aorist. 12. Polysyllables in vps have the v everywhere short, except in the singular number of the present tense active, and the third person plural of the same tense and voice; as, Letryvigt, Sevyrier ; but Sedyviper, Cevyvirre, Cebyvivas, &c. 13. On the other hand, dissyllables in ve have the v . everywhere long ; as, dv, dvvat, Edvre, &c. 14. The penult of the second future and second aorist is always short; as, daya, AGO, xpv6a, Aina ; Eddpov, &AGBov, Expvbov, EAirov. With the single exception of the verb rrAfjoow, which, in the epic dialect, retains the long vowel in the penult; as, érAzyov, érAnyny. 15. The third person plural in aoz, and the feminine par- ticiple in aca, are always long ; as, AcAoinaot, Kexpvpaot, loradot; tinpdoca, ypdypaca, &c. 16. The augment, which, in verbs beginning with v or ¢, -consists merely in lengthening this vowel, makes, of course, the initial syllable of the historical tenses long ; as, ixerevw, Inérevov, txétevoa. | ; 17. The doubtful vowel in the penult of the perfect ac- tive strictly follows the measure of the root in the present. Hence the middle syllable is short in most forms which have a in the present; as, ypddw, yéypada ; but it fluctu- ates in those with ¢ and v; as, tpi6w, tétpida, but pirra, Eppioa ; and again, xirrrw, xexdoa; but xpirrrw, Kéxpoda. 18. The perfect middle, with the exception of those which have a in the root, and change it into 0 (as rpédw, Erpador, rétpopa), has usually a long vowel in the penult ; as, dyw, DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 259 “TI break,” perfect middle %aya. So dvddvu, ada; xpd- Sw, KEkpaya ; pryéw, Eppiya; tpifw, tétpiya; dpicow, mé- dpixa, &c. But 7ép¢pdda and some others are found short, and, in old forms, the first vowel was shortened by position after rejecting the intermediate consonant; as, Gé6da, ye- yaa, dedia, Tepva. 19. Perfects with what is called the Attic reduplication have usually, in polysyllabic verbs, a short vowel in the pe- nult ; as, dAeipw, dAndAida; dpiocw, dpapiya, &c. Still, however, in Ionic poets, forms of this kind are occasionally lengthened ; as, eiAjAovOa, breuvjuixe (Il. 22, 491). 20. When a is inserted in the third person plural of the perfect or pluperfect, or of the optative, it is always short ; as, dpwpéydto, xexAidrat, reOoldto, &c. 21. ‘The reduplication before the root of verbs in pu is short ; as, TiOnust, didwut. ~ 22. In verbs in pe the ais always short; as, lordrov, lorauev, &c. Except in the third person plural in dot, and in the masculine and feminine participles ; as, Zordot, iordc, iordoa. IX. DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. As a general rule, it may be laid down that a doubtful vowel in the penult of Greek words is generally short. Some particular exceptions, however, will here be noted." I. Long a in the penult. 1. In @jp and compounds ; IroAeuaic, Avedwv, Mayawy, Iloce:dawy, and the like; Add¢ and derivatives ; vddc, aif, and compounds ; and in verbs in dw, when dw is preceded by an ¢ or the letter p; as, dw, Trepaw, dpaw, ‘with their compounds. Still, however, there are sev- eral exceptions; as, Kvkdw, Tipaw, EpvOplaw, pedtaw, oryaw, owwnaw, &c., in which dw is not preceded by an € or the letter p. 1. These exceptions are noted more fully in the larger Prosody. 260 2. DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. In lxdévw and compounds. So, also, in xeyévw and @0aGvw with Homer and the epic poets, but xtydvw and-Odvw in the Attic tragic writers. In all derivatives from verbs in dw pure and pdw ; as, Ocdpua, Yedowc, Sedtéb¢ ; dpapa, dpdatc, Opardc ; Lapua, ldowc, latpoc, &c. . In names of nations and proper names; as, ’Aovar7e, Xnapriarns, Teyedrnc. And also in the feminines formed from them; as, ’Aovdti¢, Midedtic. Add like- wise names of rivers, mountains, and islands; as, Ev- gparnc, Nedadrns, Aeveadrnc, &c. But forms of this kind proceeding from short roots have the short vowel ; as, Aadparne, Taddrne, &c. Il. Long ¢ tn the penuit. . I in the penultimate is long in Homeric feminines, such as depyln, dOuuin, drorin, &c., where the Attics have dpyia, d0vyia, dmotia, &c. But dvia and xa- Ata are long in both Homeric and Attic Greek, the Homeric form being dyin and xadin. Another term, kovia (Hom. xovin), has the penult common in Ho- meric Greek, but in the singular more frequently long, in the plural always short. In the tragic writers it oc- curs thrice, and each time with the penult short. I is long in proper names in cwy, which shorten the vowel in the genitive ; as, ’Audiwy, Aodiwy, Tavdiwy, gen. IIavdiovoc. On the contrary, those remain short which take the long vowel in the genitive ; as, Bovxo- Aiwy, ’Hetiwy, Olvoriwy, gen. Olvoriwvoc. . Comparatives in éwy have the ¢ long in Attic, but short elsewhere ; as, yAvkiwy, xariwy, &c. . Tis long in the penult of verbs in fw, not proceeding from roots in ¢w; as, d6iw, ypiw, mplw, KvAiw, &c. But those which had originally a ¢ in the root are short; as, driw, paotiw, to which add éo6iw and diw, though not from such roots. ~- DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 261 5. I is long in the penult of verbs in 4vw ; as, KAivw, xpi- vw, Tive, dpivw, &c. Except rivw and p6ivw, which are long in Homer, but short in Attic. . I is long in nouns in én, frye, étig ; as, ’Adpodirn, "Augitpitn, Owpatitic, ToAirnc, émAitnc, &e. Ex- cept, however, xpity¢, and other derivatives from the perfect passive with a short penult. Tif. Long v in the penult. . Y is common in the penult of verbs in dw. Some, however, occur more frequently with the long penult ; as, loytw, daxpiw, tvw, Yiw, Avw; others, again, are found more commonly with the short penult ; as, Bova, apvw, apTvw, detkviw, TANGIW, &c. . . T is long in most verbals in vya, from verbs in vo ; as, Jia, Kia, Avpa, dpTripa, unvipa ; except, how- ever, épipa, TAvpa, pipma, “a river,” &c., which are invariably short. . YT ic long in Bdpog, “ animus,” and its compounds, aOvp0¢, paBipoc, &c. But Yipoc, “ thymus,” has the penult short. . TY is long in the plural cases of the pronoun ov; as, DUELC, DUG, VuLY, Dude. . Y is long in verbs in dvw; as, evOdva, OTpiVH, TAD- vw, &c., but not in the future; as, evOvva, drpivw. When, however, they terminate in éw, the v is short ; as, TAVVEW. - - T is long in all verbs in vpw ; as, dUpW, CUPW, KUPH, d0ipw, &c. But, when dpw becomes vpéw, the v is short ; as, KUpéw, paptipéw, &c. . Y before o is almost always long; as, Alovicoc, Xpiodc, "“Audpiooc, Kaybvonc, &c. Except verbals in votc; as, Avowc, dviatc, &c. ‘ 8. Y is long in derivatives in dTyp, DTS, and drIg; a8, pnvitnp, unvitns, npeabirns, mpecbuTic ~ 262 FINAL SYLLABLES. 9. Y is long in adjectives in tro¢ derived from long verbal roots in dw ; as, dddxpitoc, moAvddxpiTos, GtT- pitos, &c. | ' 10. YT is long in verbs in vyw; as, Bpiyw, Tpiyw, and their compounds. ll. TY is long in the following words ; yvyn, piyoc, euppdyoc, katapoye, &c. X. DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULTIMATE. The doubtful vowels before the penultimate are generally short. ‘The exceptions to this rule are, however, many in number, and are best learned from a prosodial lexicon.' XI. FINAL SYLLABLES. I. Final a, av, ap, and ac. L Final a is short; as, tpdrrela, iva, lrnéra, téruga. Exceptions. 1. But a pure is long; as, ’AOjvad, ptAla, onda; ex- cept verbals in rpta; as, wadAtpid; and derivatives from adjectives in 4¢; as, dAjOeva ; and also lépeca, Kadetd, Bacired (“a queen”); but Baorrcla (“a king- dom”) and Baotdcia (adj. fem. “ royal’) have the fina] vowel long. | 2. The Doric a for 7 is long; as, dapd, Alvela ; and also the Doric genitive in a from nominatives in a¢ and nc; as, ’Avvibdc, a; ’Atpeidne, a. 3. Words in da and Ya have the a long; as, BaolArvda, Anda, Teaiba, except dxavOd and A104. 4. Words ending in pa, not preceded by a diphthong ; as, Kapa, THPG, yapa, except dyxipa, yépupa, bAvpda, xépxipa, and the perfect middle of verbs in pw; as, dvépOopa, TETrOpaG. 5. Words ending in pa, with a consonant preceding ; as, 1. They are given in full in the larger Prosody. FINAL SYLLABLES. 263 Gypa, wétpa, dxéotpad ; except ododpa, oxodorévdpa, Tavaypa. 6. All feminines adjectives from masculines in oc, as, dixala ; except did, réTu4, ld, and pid. 7. Duals in a, as povod; and vocatives from nouns in ac; as, Alveia@; or poetical vocatives of the third de- clension ; as, Aaoddya, MoAvddpa. 8. The accusative in ea, from the genitive (third declen- sion) in ewe ; as, IInAéa, from Indéwe ; Baordéd, from BaotAéws ; but, in Homeric Greek, InAna, from I7- Anos ; BaotAna, from BaotAjoc. 9. Nouns in eéa, from verbs in etw; as, mpopyreta, dov- deta. II. Final ay is short ; as, dv, ndpndy, Alay, péAdy, roly- ody, Ervipav. Exceptions. 1. Masculines in ay are long ; as, Tiray, mrad. 2. The neuter adjective may; and hence the Attics ap- pear to have taken occasion to lengthen here and there the forms compounded with it; as, adv, érinay, rap- anav. But mandy and mpérayv are probably every- where decidedly short. 3. Adverbs in av; as, Aidv, dyav, mépav. On the con- trary, 6ra@v and é7érdy follow the quantity of the sim- ple dy. 4. Accusatives of the first declension, from a long nom- inative ; as, drAlay, from g@iAid; Alveidy, from Alveiac. But the accusative in av from a short nominative is short; as, toTviay, from rorvid ; TpaTecav, from tpd- ECA. 5. The Doric genitive plural of the first declension. in ay, formed by contraction, is likewise always long ; as, pediay, vuuday, for pedAiwyv, vuugay. So, also, 264 FINAL SYLLABLES. the Doric forms derived from those in 7, or produced by contraction ;. as, 7rocay, Tloceuday, ’AAKuav. III. Final ap is short ; as, Svdp, véxrip, pdxap. Exceptions. "1. Monosyllables in ap are long ; as, nap, ap. 2. The adverb ydp is properly short ; but before of and similar words it very often occurs long in epic lan- guage, through the force of the following breathing. IV. Final ac is long ; as, Alvelac, mac, ludc, giAlac, Tb- pac, nae. Exceptions. 1. Words of the third declension, not forming the genitive in avto¢ ; as, péAde, péydc, Adundc, ofAdc, népac, &c But tdAd¢ has the final syllable long. 2. ‘The accusative plural of nouns and participles of the third declension ; as, Titavdc, rimrovrdc, roipevac, dpévac, &c. (but BaotAéac, from BaotAéa). ‘The accu- sative plural of the first declension, on the other hand, is always long. 3. Adverbs in ac are short ; a8, TéAdc, dtpéuac, dynac. 4. Ac is short in the second person of the different tenses which terminate therein ; as, &reydc, réyferdc, oldac, AédotTrac, TEDUKAC. 5. By a license of the Doric dialect, forms in ac, other- wise long, are occasionally shortened, and that, too, even in accusatives plural of the first declension ; as, poipag (Theocrit. 2, 160); avta¢ (Id. 3, 2); vipdac (Id. 4, 29). Il. Final t, ev, and tc. I. Final ¢ is short; as, (pt, Sri, wéAt, rorrovol, riOnul, &c. PINAL SYLLABLES. 265 Exceptions. 1. But the abridged form xpi (for xpi@n) is long, together with the names of letters in z; as, &i, 7, &c. 2. The paragogic 4, added by the Attic comic poets and orators to certain pronouns and adverbs, is likewise long ; a8, ovTool, vvvi, ovTwoi, &c. So the similar ¢ in the words 607, ravi, devpi, &c. 3. Adverbs ending in z, and formed from nouns, have the ~’ ¢ either long or short, but more commonly short; such as duoyOi, duaynri, navdnul, tavomAi, drovnrt, &c. But those which refer to nations have the ¢ always short; as, LavOori, ’Apyodtori, Bapbaproti, &c. II. Final cy is short; as, romrrovoty, Epiv, waAtv, réAiy, Tply, viv, odpiv. Exceptions. 1. Final cy, making tvo¢ in the genitive, is long; as, pry- piv, leriv. 2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; as, deAgiy (otherwise deAdic), dxriv, piv, tv, Atv. 3. The datives plural 7jujy and viv, though in several instances Sophocles makes 7iv and piv, and the epic dialect has also dupiv, vupiv. III. Final c¢ is short ; as, dic, tpic, réAic, Tupavvic, &c. Exceptions. ; 1. Monosyllabic nouns, and those which have two ter- minations for the nominative ; as, l¢, Aic, pic, Kic, deA- dic, antic. 2. Dissyllables which make the penult of the genitive long; as, dwic, Badbic, KAnic, cynutc, kpnric, dpvic, &e. 3. Polysyllables with two short syllables before the last ; as, Batpayic, kaAauic, Kavovic, tAoKapic papavic, but not Bactric, lxertic. 4. Adjectives in ee, compounded from long forms, are like- 4 266 FINAL SYLLABLES. wise long in the final syllable ; as, dAccpnric, Babv-— aunts, &c. Ill. Final v, vy, vp, and ve. I. Final v is short ; as, ov, yévd, yAvav, ddapv, dord. Exceptions. . The third person singular of the imperfect and second aorist of verbs in vz; as &dv, Edd; also the second person of the nnperaave:s in one of its forms ; as, des- KVD, OUD. 2. The names of the letters i, vv, and fictitious wore; : as, U, ypv. ' JI. Final vy is short ; as, ovv, moAvy, Bpadiy, se add Exceptions. 1. The accusative of nouns which have vc in the nom- inative ; as, lAvy, lLyOvy, loyiv, dopoy, piv. 2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; as, Dépxvy (otherwise Pdépxvc) ; or bvoc in the genitive ; as L0d0uV. 3. The first person singular of the imperfect and the sec- ond aorist of verbs in vue; as, Epvy, Eddy, edelxvir, éCevyvor. 4. Nvyv, “ now,” is long; but vv, the enclitic, is for the most part short. It is long, however, on several oc- casions in tragedy, and always long in comedy.' Gad III. Final vp is long; as, rip, pdéprip. Yet, in the ob- lique cases, these make rriipoc, wipe ; udpTvpoc, pdpript. IV. Final ve is short; as, Pages KOpuC, THUS, TpEcbvC, Bapvs, o5v¢. Exceptions. 1. Nouns in ve, which have voe in the genitive ; as, dy- Ave, lAve, tx Ove, vndvc, odpic, TANOUC. 1. Ellendt, however, Lez. Soph. s. v., maintains that yvy enclitic is never long. F our of METRE. 267 2. Nouns which have two terminations in the nominative; as, POpKvc. . 3. Monosyllables ; as, pi¢, ove. 4. Terminations of verbs in vue; as, detxvic (second person singular present), desxvic (participle), édeix- vig, &e. OF FEET. I. A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables, and 1s either simple or compound. II. Of the simple feet four are of two, and eight of three syllables. III. There are sixteen compound feet, each of four syllables. g Pyrrhich . . = j Spondee .. = 1 ie ee Tee oil = Trochee Tribrach Molossus . . Dactyl . . . Anapest .. Bacchius .. Antibacchius . Amphibrach . Amphimacer . Eight of three syllables Choriambus_ . Antispast Ionic a majore Tonic a minore Peon primus . Peon secundus Peon tertius . Peon quartus . vs. Sixteen of four syllablea Epitritus primus . Epitritus secundus Epitritus tertius . Epitritus quartus . Proceleusmaticus . Dispondeus Diiambus | Ditrocheus SmmpLe FEE. two short syllables . . two long syllables . one short and one long - one long and one short . three short . . three long one long and two short | two short and one long . one short and two long two long and one short . one long between two short “ . one short between two long ‘“ Compounn Feer. . Trochee and Jambus Iambus and Trochee Spondee and Pyrrhich . . Pyrrhich ahd Spondee . . Trochee and Pyrrhich . Tambus and Pyrrhich Pyrrhich and Trochee . Pyrrhich and Iambus Iambus and Spondee Trochee and Spondee . Spondee and Iambus Spondee and Trochee . Two Pyrrhichs . . Two Spondees . Two Jambi . Two Trochees as, O&S¢. 6¢ oxi. “ 98a. “ oGud. THAELC. evyoag. - ouudra. BdoiAcdc. dvaocet. pavrevya. VdAacod. . déondtHi¢. cixpptoten. GhUpThEG. xdounropa. TAESVEKTIC. ‘S ExéorariHe. Oborixhyd. Dochmius . . . Antispast and long syllable * dudpripdrav, aS mh 268 DACTYLIC MEASURE. METRE. 1. Merare, in its general sense, means an arrangement of syllables and feet in verse, according to certain rules ;. and in this sense it applies not only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or any number of verses. 2. But a metre, in a specific sense, means a combination of two feet, and sometimes one foot only. 3 There are nine principal metres; viz., 1. Iambic ; 2. Trochaic ; 3. Anapestic ; 4. Dactylic ; 5. Choriambic ; 6. Antispastic ; 7. Ionic a majore ; 8. Ionic a minore; 9. Pxonic. 4. These names are derived from the feet which prevail in them. Each species of verse would seem originally to have been composed of those feet solely from which it deriveg its name ; and other feet, equal in time, were not admitted until afterward, and then only under certain re- strictions. 5. It must be carefully noted, that two feet make a metre in the iam- bic, trochaic, and anapestic measures, but that one foot constitutes a metre in all the rest. 6. When a verse consists of one metre it is called monometer ; when it has two metres, dimeter ; three metres, frimeter ; four, telrameter ¢ five, pentameter ; six, hezameter ; seven, heptameter. 7. From what has just been remarked, it follows that, in iambic, tro- chaic, and anapestic verse, a monometer consists of two feet ; a dimeter of four ; a trimeter of siz, &c.; whereas, in all other kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one foot, a dimeter of /wo, a trimeter of three, &c. 8. Verses are also denominated acatalectic when complete ; catalectic when they want a syllable at the end ; brachycatalectic when they want two syllables at the end: hypercatalectic when they have a syllable over at the end ; and acephalous when they want a syllable at the beginning. 9. The last syllable of a verse is common, except in anapestic and greater Ionic measure. DACTYLIC MEASURE.! 1. Dactylic hexameter, or heroic verse, is composed of six feet, the last of which must be a spondee, while the fifth is almost always a dac- tyl. The first four may be either dactyls or spondees, at the option of the poet. Thus, yaldv dp | ob Kai | rovrdv dp | Gpet | & odpévd | Oév vi. 2. Sometimes, in a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, the 1. Amore enlarged view of the Greek metres is given in the author's Groek Progody, IAMBIC MEASURE. * 969. epondee takes the place of the dactyl in the fifth foot, and the line is then called a spondaic one ; as, © Axi | Aed KEE | at w= AT | 7 PIAE | ud6q | caobal. 3. A short syllable in the beginning of a foot is often made long in epic poetry. The reason is, that, as the first syllable of the foot was pro- nounced with the rising inflection of the voice in heroic verse, so by pro nouncing it, when short, with a sharper tone, it was brought nearer in sound toa long syllable, by which the deficiency in time was scarcely perceived. The following examples show a short cesural syllable made long at the beginning of a foot : vavdoyor | é¢ Aivev | d xal | rig Sed | Hyeud | vevev. div’ Gxog | GtAn | tov 6 & dp | a Tpw | oiv peve | aivor. II. PENTAMETER. ; 1. This species of verse consists of two equal portions, each contain- ing two feet followed by a long syllable. 2. The first two feet may be either dactyls or spondees, then comes a long syllable, to which succeed two dactyls, followed by another long syllable. Thus, EpTvAA | dg Ketr | at || rate EAT | Kdvia | oF. TOAue | év JF Epto | ai || oxdrke & | HddvT | civ. 3. The pause always takes place after the long syllable in the middle of the verse, marked by the double line in the two examples just given. 4. Another, but less correct' mode of scanning pentameters is as fol- lows : the first and second feet either a dactyl or spondee, the third al- ways a spondee, the fourth and fifth anapests; as, obTé. xdd | Gv apEr | Ho od | rE wGAaio | pdotrvi7e. | 5. A dactylic hexameter and pentameter, alternately succeeding each other, form what is called elegiac verse. Thus, kphvai | at Av6d | dé, rl nt | gedyart ; | rod rdadv | Dddp ; Tig PAE | GEva | od¢ || EcbEoeY | GEAT | od; III. IAMBIC MEASURE.! 1. The only species of iambic verse which we will here consider is the trimeter acatalectic, called also senarius, from its containing siz feet. 2. In the trimeter the iambus is admitted into any one of the six places ; and, when all the feet are thus iambi, the verse is called a pure ‘iambic one. 1. Consult ae rial Prosody. 270 ANAPASTIC MEASURE. 3. A pure iambic line, however, is not of so frequent occurrence among the tragic writers as what is called a msxed one, namely, where other feet are admitted besides the iambus. 4. The reason why other feet were allowed to enter appears to have been, not only to lessen the difficulty of composing, but in order to re- move the monotonous and unpleasing effect of a succession of iambi, and also to impart more dignity and elevation to the style. 5. The feet admissible into this measure, besides the iambus, are the spondee, dactyl, anapest, and tribrach. The rules for their admission are as follows : 1. The spondee is allowed to enter into the uneven places, namely, the first, third, and fifth, and into no other. 2. The dactyl is admitted into the first and third places only. 3. The anapest is admitted into the first place alone, except in the case of a proper name, when it may come into any place but tha last, provided the anapest be all contained within the proper name. 4. The tribrach may come into any place but the last. 6. The following lines may serve to illustrate some of these laws. 5 mao | U xAeiv || d¢ Od | Lrode |] xaAod | pevoe. || adic | orEvay || pote xat | yooig || rAodriC | Erai. || Bar por | Sv adr || of¢ yiv | avi || Eval | iva. || Yepic | Ec || Ev Ziw | Bor of |] E 7? & | BEGr. | rérapt | Sv Inn || SuEdGvT | Axéor || ecAEv | warp. || Hijtpo¢ | Giyizv || al xai | warépa || xara | xré&veiv. || 7. The double mark in these lines, after every two feet, indicates what is called a metre; it having been customary in reciting iambic verses to make a short pause after every second foot. Hence the name trimeter given to this species of lines, from their containing each three of these metres. IV. ANAPAESTIC MEASURE. 1. The most common species of anapestic verse is the dimeter. In a system of legitimate dimeters each metre should end with a word, and the system should end with a catalectic verse called the paroemiac, pre- ceded by a monometer acatalectic. 2. This metre admits indiscriminately the dacty] and spondee for the anapest. But an anapest ought not to follow a dactyl, to avoid too many short syllables occurring together. 3. In the catalectic verse, or paroemiac, which closes a system, the catalectic syllable should be preceded by an anapest. There are, how- ever, some verses in which it is Joined to a spondee. , iG ANAPESTIC MEASURE. 271 4. The last syllable of averse in this metre, with the exception of the paroemiac, is not common, but subject to the same laws of quantity ag if it was found in any other part of the verse. 5. The following is a system of anapestic dimeters, closing with a paroemiac : a yap |p bud pau, || vepbev | P atbo0 || Tov véKpo | d&ypdvde || ei¢ GrEp | Gvrov || Taprapov | 7Kév, || dEopoic | ZAvroic || ayplig | wEAdode, || O¢ uA | TE GEde, || BATE tig | GAAGs || roto” Exé | y7Oei. || viv J aif | Eplov || kiviyp’ | 5 raAae || ExOpoic | Extxapr || 4 rExGv6 | @. APPENDIX. EXCURSUS A. GREEK ALPHABET. 1. According to tradition, Cadmus brought sixteen letters from Pha- nicia into Greece, to which Palamedes, at a subsequent period, added four more, namely, 3, &, ¢, 7; and Simonides, at a still later day, in- creased this number by other four, ¢, 7, #, w. 2. The meaning of this tradition evidently is, that the Pheenician al- phabet was introduced into different parts of Greece in a more or less perfect shape; that some tribes received all the letters, while others were content with sixteen; that these last-mentioned tribes, however, gradually increased the number of alphabetical characters, by borrowing, at two different epochs, certain letters previously used in the more per- fect systems of other Grecian communities. - 3. The old sixteen, or primitive Cadmean letters, are supposed to have been the following, the v being assigned to its true place as the representative of the digamma, and being indicated by the old sign of the digamma, namely, F. ABTAEFIKAMNOTPET. 4. A change, however, subsequently took place as regarded the m- troduction of Y, which was formed from the Fav, or digamma; dy split- ting its upper part. This new letter was then placed after the T, while the F itself was omitted. - 5. The Ionians first adopted all the twenty-four letters, and of them first the Samians, from whom they were received by the Athenians ; but it was not till after the Peloponnesian War, in the archonship of Eucli- des (B.C. 403), that they were used in public acts. Hence the twenty- four letters are called ‘lwvixd ypdéupara, and the old sixteen ’Arrixd /papuara. 6. In the most ancient times, according to Pausanias (5, 25), the Greeks, like the Orientals, wrote from right to left. They soon began, however, to write the first line from the left to the right, in the second from the right to the left, and so on alternately. This was called fov- 274 APPENDIX. orpo¢ndov, from its resembling the mode in which the ox turns with the plough. So the laws of Solon were written. But, as carly as the time of Herodotus, it was the established custom to write from left to right. EXCURSUS B. DIGAMMA.! 1. The whole subject of the digamma rests on the following remark- able fact. A certain number of words beginning with a vowel, especially the pronoun 02, ol, &, and also eldw, gorxa, eiteiv, ava, “TAcoc, olvoc, olxo¢, Epyov, looc, Exacroc, with their derivatives, have m Homer the hiatus so often before them, that, leaving these words out of the account, the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Homer, becomes extremely rare, and, in most of the remaining cases, can be easily and naturally accounted for. These same words have also, in comparison with others, an apos- trophe very seldom before them; and, moreover, the immediately prece- ding long vowels and diphthongs are far less frequently rendered short than before other words. 2. From an attentive examination of the subject, the illustrious Bent- ley was led to conclude, that the words before which these deviations from the usual rules of prosody took place, although beginning with a vowel, must have been pronounced at least, if not written, as if begin- ning with a consonant. He recollected that some ancient grammarians mentioned a letter as more particularly used by the Holians or most an- cient Greeks; and that its existence might be traced in the changes which some Latin words, derived from the olic Greek, had undergone ; as, olvog, vinum ; Ic, vis; olxoc, vicus; 7p, ver. ‘The letter alluded to, which, from its form, has the name of digamma or double gamma (F), is yet to be seen in some ancient inscriptions and on coins ; and it supplies the data for resolving the cases of metrical] difficulty, where the length- ening of a short syllable uniformly takes place before particular words. 3. Let us examine some of the instances which are found at the very opening of the Iliad. ’Arpéidy¢ te dvag avdpadv (v. 7); ’Ayapéuvove fvdave Suu@ (v. 24); ’AwoAAwYe Gvaxte (v. 36); 6 O Hee vuKTi Lorna (v. 47) ; Sapojoac pada, ein? (v. 85). In all these cases, according to the practice of the language in the days of Attic purity, the short vowel ought to have been elided before avag, 7vdave, &c. But if we write Favag, Fyvdave, &c., or fancy the words pronounced wavag, wyvdare, wewotkac, were, &c., the difficulty will in a great degree disappear. 1. Buttmann, Ausf. Gr. Sprachl. p 27.—Buttmann's Larger Gr. Gr. p. 28, Robd- inson’s transl.—Maltby's Greek Gradus, p. xi., seg. ~ APPENDIX. | 275 EXCURSUS C. ACCENTS. 1. In every polysyllabic word, one syllable is to be regarded as the fundamental or radical syllable, or, in other words, that which contains the principal idea of the word. The rest, on the contrary, which are prefixed or appended to the fundamental syllable in the formation of words, are, in respect to the idea, of less weight. ‘ 2. The ascendant importance of the fundamental syllable of a word i 18, in every independent language, indicated by a sharpened elevation of the voice in its pronunciation ; as, for example, du in duty, or set in beset. 3. This elevation of the voice in pronouncing one syllable of a word is called the tone or accent (mpoowdia, accentus), which can occur only once in each word, and of itself is one and the same in all words, namely, the acute or elevated accent (mpocwdia dfeia, accentus acutus). As a sign for this, use is made of a stroke from right to left (”); as, for exam- ple, Adyog. 4. In comparison with the accented or elevated syllable, all syllables of a word which are not accented must be spoken with a depressed or unelevated accent (zpoowdia Bapeia, accentus gravis). This depressed or grave accent is represented by an opposite sign, namely, a stroke from left to right (); so that Adyoc was in fact Adydc. But, because every syllable of a word which has not the acute accent is necessarily to be spoken with the depressed tone, the sign for the grave is not used, but these syllables remain unmarked. 5. As an indication of the proper grave, therefore, is unnecessary, its sign is used for another purpose, namely, to mark what is called the "softened acute at the final syllable of words in a continued discourse, and of which mention will presently be made. 6. If two vowels, the first of which has the acute, the second the grave, are united into one sound, this long sound receives a sign, which is formed by the union of those two, namely, (’~) or (“); for which, how- ever, a twisted line (~) is more conveniently used,! indicating that the accent is to be lengthened in the pronunciation (zpoowdia mepronwpévn, accentus circumflezus) ; a3, for example, d7A0¢ for dééAoc, oGua for od6ua. Position of the Accents. In order to accentuate a Greek word correctly, it is necessary, 1. to determine the syllable on which the accent rests; and, 2. to know the sign by which, according to the nature of that and the remaining sylla- 1. In the Porsonian type a semicircular mark is employed ; as, o@pa. 276 APPENDIX. bles of the word, the accent is to be indicated. Concerning these two points, we shall here briefly assign what admits of accurate definition. I. Determination of the accented syllable. - 1. A Greek word can have its tone or accent only on one of the last three syllables. 2. In simple radical words (that is, those which are formed with a definite termination from an existing root, and not derived from a word already formed) the accent rests on the radical syllable; thus, root Aey, whence Aéyw, “ I say ;” Aééec, “ expression 3” Abyos, “ speech.” 8. In words which are derived from others, either by a prefix or an appended termination, the accent usually rests on the supplemental part (because thie, as the sign of distinction from the radical word, defines the idea); thus, from Adyo¢ is derived GAoyoc, “ speechless ;”” from xdp- soc, ‘ fruit,” come dxaproc, “ fruitless,” and evxaproc, “ fruitful ;” from Aéyw are derived Aexréc, ‘said,’ and Aexréoc, “ to be said ;” from Op, “an animal,” is derived Onpiov, “ a wild beast.” 4. The nature of the final syllable has a decisive influence on the po- sition of the accent ; namely, if the final syllable of ¢ word be long by naturé, the accent cannot lie farther towards the beginning of the werd than on the penultimate syllable. Fora long syllable being equal to two short ones, if the accent were placed on the antepenult when the last syllable is long by nature, it would: be placed, in fact, four places back from the end, whereas it can never go farther back than three. The following cases, however, are to be noted as exceptions from this last rule. 1. The w which the Attic and Ionic dialects make use of in declen- sion for the o of the other dialects has no influence on the posi- tion of the accent. Jt is right, therefore, to accentuate dméprAe- we (Attic and Ionic for vréprAeoc) ; pivdxepuc, * a rhinoceros ;” duvapueuc, “of power ;” ’Atpeidey, “ of Atrides.” 2. The same exception holds good of the syllables az and oz, as ter- minations in declension and conjugation. Hence we properly accentuate rpdérecat, “ tables ;" Aéyerat, “it is said ;” EAagot, “stags.” The termination of the third person singular of the optative, however, again forms an exception to this, and, being the result of contraction, is long as regards the accent. We are therefore to accentuate éx¢épor, not Exdepor, from Exdépw ; veK7}- gat, not vixnoat, as the optative of yvixdu.! 1. From these fundamental rules numerous exceptions are found in Greek, which are best learned from actual reading and a good lexicon. ~ APPENDIX. Q277 5. Some small words are so unimportant of themselves, that, in dis- course, they almost unite their sound with the following word, and, there- fore, remain unaccented. These are the forms 4, 7, ol, ai, of the article, besides the prepositions el¢ or é¢, év or elv, éx or é& ; the conjunctions el, o¢, and the negative ov, ovx, ody. These are called drova, “ tone- less,” or mpoxActixd, ‘‘ prociitec.” Some of them, on a change of signi- fication or position, receive the acute, namely, 1. the adduced forms of the article, when used as pronouns ; 2. Sc, when it either stands for of- Tw¢, “ thus,” “ so,” or in the signification “ as” or “like,” is placed after the chief word ; as, xaxol dc, ‘as cowards” or “ coward-like ; 3. od or obx, when it directly denies, without an additional word, like the Eng- lish ‘‘ no,” or is placed after the word which it negatives. II. Sign of the accent according to the nature of the syllables. If the syllable on which the tone rests is known, the question then is, with what sign it is to be accented. Concerning this the following rules obtain : 1. The acute can stand on each of the last three syllables ; as, xaxde, “bad ;” odie, “a city ;” GvOpwroc, ‘a man.” But it can stand on the third syllable from the end only when the last syllable is short by na- ture ; thus, dvOporov, dvOpony, avOporoic, although the nominative is marked év@pwrroe.! 2. The circumflex can only stand on a syllable long by nature, and only on the final or penultimate syllable, but never on the penultimate unless the final syllable is short by nature ; thus, Iepexdije, ** Pericles ;”’ xaxov, “of evil ;” xapog, ‘ space;” Aeize, “leave.” On the contrary, Aeinety, “ to leave ;” yet Aeipar, xHpor, according to rule 2, § 4 of the previous head. 3. The mark properly belonging to the grave accent appears only on the last syllable of words standing in a continued discourse, as a sign of the softened tone of the acute. Thus, avjp, ‘‘a man ;” dyadc, “ brave ;” buf in connected discourse, dvyp GyaBdg od gevyet, ‘a brave man fleth | not away.” 4. The intimate connexion of discourse, which would be interrupted by the sharpened pronunciation of the acute on the final syllable of a word, alone renders necessary the transition of the acute into the grave. This change, therefore, must not take place before one of the greater signs of interpunction (period and colon); nor even before a comma, when it indicates a really distinct member of a proposition. But we 1. For the double exception to the rule, that the acute can stand on the antepenult tn case only of a short final syllable, see res 2, 64 of the previous head. A 278 APPENDIX. also use the comma in assigning nearer definitions, and predicates, before relatives and before expositive or intentional particles, where evidently the internal connexion of the discourse must not be interrupted, and in this case, in Greck, the sign of the acute must not be placed on the final syllable before the comma. Thus, it is proper to write, ri dé, #v yp7pa- Ta woAAG Exy Tic; and, in like manner, of pév dyaOoi, of dé? xaxoi, be- cause here is a perceptible cesura in the discourse ; but sraryp, 6¢ Edwxe, and éAeye woAAd, oc, x. T. A., because here no abrupt separation of the single members of the proposition occurs. 5. If the third syllable from the end is accented, it always possesses the acute. 6. If the final syllable is accented, it always bears the acute (or, in continued discourse, the grave), except when it arises by contraction, or forms the genitive and dative of the first two declensions, or belongs, as the termination, to adverbs in we. Thus, Bacidevc, “a king,” but Ba- otAei (contracted from BaciAéi) ; Kaxd¢, xaxj, Kaxdv, Kaxovc, but Kaxoo, KaKij¢, KaKov, KaK@, Kaxgj, kKaxGv, Kaxoi¢ (as genitive and dative of the first two declensions) ; xaxdé¢, an adverb. 7. Every dissyllabic word whose penult is long by nature, and followed by a short fina] syllable, is marked with a circumflex on the penult ; as, Aphua, XGpoc, Teixoc, xeioGac. 8. Words have denominations according to the position of the accent. If the final syllable bears the acute, the word is called an orytone (d&v- Tovov), as, for example, xaxdg ; if the circumflex, a perispome (mepromd- pevov), as, woveciy ; if the final syllable is unaccented, the word is a bar- yton (Gapvrovoyv). If the accent rests on the penult as an acute, the word is parozyton (mapofvrovoy), as, vouoc ; if as a circumflex, proper- ispome (mporeptom@pevov), as, oGua ; and, lastly, if the actite stands on the third syllable from the end, the word is proparorytone (nporapogv- Tovoy), as, dvOpwroc. Ill. Change of Accents. 1. If a word possessing an accent experiences such a change, by de- clension, or conjugation, or composition, that either the number or meas- ure of. its syllables is increased, the accent also is usually changed. These changes. of the accent are of a threefold kind, namely : 1. The accent remains on the syllable on which it stands, but is itself altered, and becomes, (A.) An acute from a circumflex ; as, cdaroc, from odua; yopov, from xGpoc ; xeiveOa, from xeiobas. (B.) A circumflex from an acute ; as, gedye, from gevyw. APPENDIX. 279 . The accent advances towards the end of a word, ae ) If the word is increased by the annexation of syllables, so that the original accented syllable has more than two syllables between it and the end of the word ; as, dv@porocgt, from dvOpwroe ; Be- Aéecor, from PéAog ; wivévtwr, from mivw; eoreAAéoOyy, from oTédAw. (B.) If the word receives a termination which always or usually has the accent ; as, TETUPOC, TEeTUSéval, TUTeic, TeTvupEevos, all formed from riztw ; Onpd¢, from Yip; Kio¢, from xic, &c. (C.) If, in the change of a word, the final syllable, which was be- fore short, becomes long; as, dvOporov, from avOpuroe ; érépou, from Erepoc ; mpayzdruv, from mpdypa. 3. The accent is drawn back towards the beginning of a word. This takes place, (A.) If the word receives additions at the beginning, or if the cause is removed which held the accent on the penult ; as, Erumroy, érurre, from runtw ; waideve, from radetw ; AdcAog, from ¢gidog ; ovvodoc, from édéc¢. (B.) If, in dissyllabic words, the final syllable, which should bear the accent, is dropped on account of a succeeding vowel ; as, $71’ éyo for dnui; and m6AA’ Exafoy for moAAd; deiv’ ErAnv for dewvd. But prepositions and particles, when the accented final vowel is dropped, remain unaccented; as, én’ avrov for éxi; map’ éuoi for wapdé ; GAA’ Eyo for dAAd ; obd’ bAcyov for ovdé. IV. Recession of the accent to a preceding word. 1. Several small words unite themselves so closely, in respect to sense, with the preceding word, that they must be blended with it, as it were, in pronunciation. For this reason they throw back their accent _ on the preceding word, and hence derive the name of enclztics (uopia byxAcTixa). 2. Such enclities are: the indefinite pronoun ti¢, ri, through all the cases ; the oblique cases of the personal pronouns, pod or ped, pol, pé, god or aed, coi, oé, od or Eo, and &ev, ol, &, piv, viv, opé, opwé, opuly, odgéwr, ogioi or ogiciv, and ogiv, opéac, ogéa ; together with the pres- ent indicative of eiui and gyi (except the second person singular el¢ or el, ‘thou art; dc, “ thou sayst) ;” and, lastly, the adverbs and parti- cles rac, 7, rol, 17, Tod, Toli, wobév, woré, Te, Tol, yé, Ké (or Kér), Oi, vd (or viv), Tép, pa. 8. All these words throw back their accent, as acute, on the last syl 280 APPENDIX. lable of the preceding word ; but the accentuation of that preceding word decides whether this accent must be expressed or not. Concerning this point the following rules must be obeerved : (A.) If the preceding word is accented on the last syllable, or is marked with the acute on the penult, the enclitic loses its accent without farther change of the preceding word ; yet it is evident that the grave becomes an acute, because, properly, the enclitic unites itself immediately to the preceding word, and. the accent syllable 1s therefore no longer to be considered as standing at the end of a word. Thus, we write avnp tic (as if it were aynpric) ; dyabog te Kaddc te; giAd ce; pabyTay Tivwr, avdpa Te, gidog plov. But, in the last case, when the preceding word has an acute on the penult, dissyllabic enclitics retain their proper accent ; as, 77 Aéd- yo roré tvavriog ogiciv. - (B.) If the preceding word is accented with a circumflex on the pe- - nult, or an acute on the antepenult, the accent, thrown back from the enclitic, stands as an acute on the final syllable ; as, - GvOpurdc tort Sunric ; 6 Kpoicog more tAegev. If several enclitics follow one another, the preceding always takes the accent of the succeeding, and the last only remains unac- cented ; as, ef Tic rivd oot ot Trapeivat. (C.) The enclitic retains its accent (1.) in personal pronouns after a@ preposition ; as, Tepi cov, rapa coi, mpo¢ oé ; and, in this case, the longer forms of the pronoun of the first person, éuod, Euoi, éué, must always be used ; as, éF éuod (not éx wov); év duo (not by oi). (2.) In the verb éori (which then draws back its accent to the rdBt), when it is used in the emphatic signification “ there ts,” “there exists,” ‘it 1s situated,” or else stands followed hy an infinitive, for &eors, ‘‘1¢ ts possible,” “tt 1s permitted,” “ one can ;”” as, for example, Oed¢ Eorcy, “ there is a God ;” toriv ob- Tuc, “at 1s so situated ;”” Eoriv ideiv, “ one can see.” 4. From the enclitics adduced under § 2 must yet be distinguished the particles dé and Jé or Yév, which entirely lose their independence, and become incorporated with the preceding word. Strictly considered, in annexing these particles to a word, the given rules of inclination ought also to be observed. On the contrary, 3é or Sév is usually regarded as any other appended termination ; and thus we write olxoev, not oixdbev (from vixoc). In the particle dé, however, two cases are to be distin- guished ; thus, if it is annexed to forms of nouns, it has the same influ. ence as every other enclitic, and hence we write olxdévde (from olxo¢), APPENDIX. . 281 - "Aidécde (from "Alc), dduovde (from déuoc). But if it is annexed to deé- monstrative pronouns, the accent of the principal word advances towards — that of the particle, and passes into the syllable immediately before de ; as, Toodode (from réco¢), Tordcde (from roioc). And this accent thus retains itself regularly through all the cases and forms ; consequently we write roogjde, tocoide, Tocovcde ; but rocotde, Too@de, roogde, Tocoicde. EXCURSUS D. DIALECTS. 1. Of the primitive language of the Greeks the most traces are left to us in their epic poems, the oldest monuments of the language of this people. The peculiar mode of speech observed in these is called the epic dialect. Its basis formed the old national language of the Greeks, — which the poet, however, for his own purpose, variously modified and enriched. Its principal characteristic is a rhythmical harmony and a powerful fulness of tone. 2. The epic dialect is expressed the most purely and ina perfect form in the poems of Homer and Hesiod. The rest formed themselves ac- cording to the model of these two, particularly of Homer. The most eminent of them are, Theognis and the other gnomic poets, Apollonius of Rhodes, the author of the poems extant under the names of Orpheus, Quintus Smymeus, and Nonnus. * 3. Since the epic language was derived from the stores of the general national language, and variously enriched by the poet himself; since, moreover, the dialect found in the oldest epic remained in after times appropriated to this species of poetry, and thus was continually advanced in civilization and culture by new admixtures; it is natural, therefore, that it should not appear as a complete and finished whole, but should betray in its single parts many deviations and irregularities. 4. If the basis of the epic is the old primitive language of the Greeks, and the primitive contains all the germes of the subsequent development — of a language, we may easily conceive how this dialect should evince divers traces of all the peculiarities which afterward were individually _ cultivated and retained in the single dialects. Thus, in epic occur o- lisms, Dorisms, Atticisms, and the like, as fundamental peculiarities of the Greek language. But it is erroneous to regard the epic language, on that account, as a mixture of all the dialects; as, on the other hand, it is wrong to confound it with the Ionic, from the circumstance of its having many fundamental ear in common with that dialect. a 282 APPENDIX. The same obtains of Zolisms, Dorisms, Ionisms, and Atticisms in all cases where reference is made to them by grammarians and commenta- tors. 5. The Hellenes, who migrated through Thrace into the country after- ward called Hellas, were divided into several tribes, whereof two, the Dorians and Jonians, chiefly extended themselves. Each of these tribes cultivated an independent and peculiar character in language, as well as in manners and mode of life, and after their names we denominate the two principal dialects the Doric and Jonie. 6. The Dorians, the most powerful of the Hellenic tribes, preserved their dialect, which was widely diffused as the common language in Hellas proper and the colonies, pure from foreign intermixture, but did little for the particular advancement of their language. Hence the Do- ric dialect exhibits the most harshness in its forms of words, and a flat- ness of tone from the frequent use of the dull sound A, a peculiarity termed in Greek wAarecacudéc. Besides this dialect, the Zolic also was formed according to the model of antiquity, and had many peculiarities in common with the Doric, whence it was considered as a refined col- lateral form of the same, cultivated particularly for the use of the poets. 7. The Doric and olic dialects became and continued to be the lan- guage of lyric and bucolic poetry. The character of the Doric is most purely expressed in the odes of Pindar; while those of Aleeus, Sappho, and Corinna exhibit rather the .Zolic mode. The Doric is purer in the Idyls of Theocritus. In the lyric parts of the Attic tragedies also an ap- proach to the sound of the Doric dialect has been preserved. Fragments of the Pythagorean philosophy furnish the only specimens of Doric prose. 8.. Besides these, several dialects sprung up in the mouth of the peo- ple as individual varieties of the generally-diffused Doric dialect. But their peculiar character 1s, for the most part, known only from insulated expressions and short sentences, which are adduced in historians and comic poets. The most celebrated and extensive of them are the Laco- man, Beotian, and Thessalian dialects, and, next. to these, the Siczlzan. 9. The Ionians, driven from their settlements by the Dorians, betook themselves principally to Attica, and, when that barren country was un- able to support the multitude of inhabitants, to the opposite coast of Asia. Under the mild climate of Lesser Asia, the form of their language became mild and soft, and nearly allied to the epic. Thus was devel- oped the Jontc dialect, the principal characteristic of which is a softness of expression, acquired from the frequency of vowels and the solution of harsh syllables by interposed sounds. Herodotus and Hippocrates wrote mn this dialect. 10. The numerous peculiarities common to the Ionic with the epic APPENDIX. 283 dialect have occasioned the latter also to be denominated Ionic; although . with this distinction, that the appellation of Old Ionic is given to the epic, but to the Ionic that of New Ionic. . 11. The language of the Ionians who remained behind in Attica pro- ceeded differently in its formation; and hence arose a new dialect, the Altic, which observed an intermediate course between the Doric harsh- ness and Ionic softness, adopting a perfect rotundity in its forms of words, and the greatest pliancy in their construction. The ‘political con- sequence and the high pitch of intellectual culture to which Athens ar- rived, gave a wide circulation to this dialect, and the considerable num- ber of eminent writings which are composed in it, and have been pre- served, determine it for the groundwork in the study of the Greek lap- guage. 12. The most celebrated works written in the flourishing period of the Attic language and culture are, the historical books of Thucydides, the historical and philosophical writings of Xenophon, the philosophical books of Plato, and the orations of Demosthenes, A‘schines, Lysias, Isocrates, &c., besides the tragedies of -£schylus, Sophocles, and Eu- ripides, and the comedies of Aristophanes. 13. That peculiarity which the single Grecian states had preserved in language and manners disappeared with the general decline of their freedom. Athens, however, for a long time continued the chief seat of liberal information ; and the Attic dialect, as the purest and most widely diffused, became the court language of the now ruling Macedonians, and, by degrees, the general language of writing and the people. Hence it necessarily followed, that much of the old peculiarity of this dialect was sacrificed, and many innovations were introduced in expression and in-- flexion. This language, formed on the basis of the Attic dialect, is comprehended under the name of the common dialect. The authors of this period, however, endeavoured to exhibit the Attic dialect pure and uncorrupted, according to the early models, although many peculiarities of more modern times are interspersed throughout their writings. Hence their style has received the appellation of the later Atétc. 14. Writers of this class are, Aristotle, Theophrastus, Pausanias, Apollodorus, Polybius, Diodorus, Plutareh, Strabo, Dionysius of Hali- carnassus, Lucian, lian, Arrian, &c. 15. In Macedonia the Greek language was mingled with much for- eign alloy; and, thus corrupted, it spread itself, with the extension of _ the Macedonian empire, over other barbaric nations. Hence arose what may be denominated the Macedonic dialect. 16. Alexandrea was a colony of liberal information under the Mace- donian rulers. There a circle of learned men assembled together, and = 284 APPENDIX. made it their chief study to preserve the purity of the genuine Attic dis- lect by rejecting all modern accessions, although their style also fell short of the ancient models. But the Greek language underwent a pe- culiar reformation by the translators of the Old and the authors of the New Testament, who designated by Greek expressions things of orien- tal conception and application. As this style occurs only in the Scrip- tures and some Christian writers, it has been called the ecclestastical di-_ alect, while others have preferred the epithet of Hellentstic.' 17. By degrees, the old Greek language, under the influence of various causes, so far degenerated in the mouth of the people, and was deformed by so much heterogeneous admixture, that it gave rise to the new Greek, which has almost entirely exchanged the primitive character of the old for that of the more modem tongues, and still continues, in ancient Greece, as the language of the country. 1. From the Greek &\)1viCerv, whence comes £\)1orfs, 88 referring to one who speaks after the Greek manner, and, in the present c to an Oriental to Crick: ’ P ase, trying THE END. a ©° em, | PUBLISHED BY HARPER AND BROTHERS, NEW-YORK. ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. The following works, already published, may be regarded as specimens of the whole series, which will consist of about thirty volumes. They are all bound in the most durable and tasteful manner, and are for sale at reasonable prices by the prin- cipal bouksellers throughout the United States. First Latin Lessons, containing | Sattust’s JuguRTHINE WaR AND the most important Parts of the Grammar of the Latin Language, together with appropriate Exer- cises in the translating and writing of Latin, for the Use of Beginners. 12ino. First Greek Lessons, containing the most important Parts of the Grammar of the Greek Language, together with appropriate Exer cises in the translating and writing Greek, for the Use of Beginners. 2:no, A GRAMMAR oF THE Greex Lan- euaGE, for the Use of Schools and Colleges. 12mo. A System or GREEK PrRosony AND Metre, for the Use of Schvols and Colleges; together with the Choral Scanning of the Prome.- theus Vinctus of A’schylus, and the Ajax and Qcdipus ‘l’yrannus of Sophocles; to which are append- ed Remarks on the Indo-Germanic Analogies. 12mo. C.msar’s CoMMENTARIES ON THE Gattic War; and the first Book of the Greek Paraphrase; with English Notes, critical and explan- atory, Plans of Battles, Sieges, éc., and Historical, Geographical, and Archeological Indexes. Map, Jacogs’s GREEK READER Conspiracy OF CaTILINE, with an English Commentary, and Geo- graphical and Historical Indexes. Ninth Edition, corrected and en- larged. 12:mo. Portrait. Secect Orations or Cicero, with English Notes, critical and explana- tory,and Historical, Geographical, and Legal Indexes. A new Edi- tion, with Improvements. 12mo. With a Portrait. Tue Works or Horace, with Eng- lish Notes, critical and explana- tory. New Edition, with correc- tious and improvements. 12mo. With Notes, critical and explanatory. A New Edition. 12mo. A CrassicaL DICTIONARY, contain- ing an account of all the Proper Names mentioned in Ancient Au- thors, and intended to elucidate all the important points connected with the Geography, ag Biog- raphy, Archzology, and Mythol- ogy of the Greeks and Romans, together with a copious Chrono- logical Table, and an Account of the Coins, Weights, and Measures of the Ancients, with Tabular Val- ues of the same. By Charles An- thon, LL.D. Ja one volume, royal 8vo. (Nearly ready.) Portrait, &c. i2mo. The above editions of the Classical authors are based on the latest and most accurate texts, and are accompanied by English Commentaries, con- taining everything requisite for accurate preparation on the part of the stu- dent and a correct understanding of the author. The publishers take the liberty of adding, that all of the above works have been republished in England and Scotland. -Some of them, indeed, have already passed through four editions. They are republished under the superintendence of that eminent scholar, Jawzs Boyp, LL.D., one of the masters in the High School in Edinburgh, who says, ‘‘ Jn superintend- ing the publication, I have not felt myself warranted to make any alteration on the text, as given by Professor Anthon, nor to mutilate, by the slightest omission, his admirable Explanatory Notes.” : I> A more detailed view of the plan of the series, ézc., will be found "on the next page. ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. In presenting the volumes of this series, as far as it Las been comple- ted, to the notice of the public, the subscribers beg leave to say a few words respecting its general features, and the advantages that are to re- sult from it both to students and instructers. The plan proposed is to give editions of all the authors usually read in ovr schools and colleges, together with such elementary and subsidiary works as may be needed by the classical student either at the commenco- ment, or at particular stages, of his career. The editions of the Classical authors themselves will be based on the latest and most accurate texts, and will be accompanied by English com- mentaries, containing everything requisite for accurate preparation on _ the part of the student and a correot understanding of the author. The fear entertained by some instructers, lest too copious an array of notes may bribe the student into habits of intellectual sloth, will be found to be altogether visionary. ‘That part of the series which contains the text- books for schools must, in order to be at all useful, have a more ex- tensive supply of annotations than the volumes intended for college lec- tures ; aid when these last make their appearance, the system of com- menting adopted in them will not fail to meet with the approbation of all. The advantages, then, which this series promises to confer are the following: the latest and best texts; accurate commentaries, putting the student and instructer in possession of the opinions of the best phiolo- gists; together with all such subsidiary information as may serve, not only to throw light upon the meaning of the author, but also to give rise in the young student to habits of correct thinking and to the for- mation of a correct taste. Many of the works at present used in our Classical schools are either reprints of antiquated editions, swarming with errors, not merely in the typography, but in the matter itself; or else they are volumes, fair to the view, indeed, as far as manual execution is concerned, but either supplied with meager and unsatisfactory commentaries, or without any commentaries at all. These are the works that drive students to the use of translations, and thus mar the fairest prospects of youthful scholarship, producing an infinitely stronger habit of intellectual in- dolence than the most copious commentary could engender. Indeed, to place this matter in its proper light, and to show, within a very brief compass, how much good the projected series is about to ac- complish, it may be sufficient to state, that the printed translations of those authors whose works have been thus far published in the series meet now with a much less ready sale than formerly; and are seldom, : if ever, seen in the hands of those whose instructers have the good sense and judgment to give a decided preference to the volumes edited by Professor Anthon. The publishers take the liberty to subjoin a few of the communica- tions relative to the published volumes of the series, which they have received from gentlemen of high classical reputation in different parts of the country. Hareer & Broruers, LVew- York, May, 1839. 82 CLLEF-STREET. ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. From H. Humpurey, D.D., Presi- dent of Amherst College, at Am- herst, Mass. I am very Mary to see that you have | undertaken to furnish uniform editions of the Latin classics for the use of our grammar schools and higher seminaries of learning. Professor Anthon deserves and will receive the thanks of the public Sor the labour which he has so judicious- ly and successfully bestowed upon Sal- lust, Caesar, and Cicero. The explan- atory notes or commentaries are more co- pious and cemprehensive than those of any other edition I have seen, and much ‘| better adapted tu the wants of young stw- dents. Among the most valuable of these notes are those which divert atten- tion to the beautiful uses of the moods and tenses, and explain the delicate shades of meaning and peculiar beauties that depend upon them, which our lan- guage often expresses imperfectly and with dz ers rarely regard. The explanations of the force and meaning of the particles are also very useful. The historical, geographical, and oth- er indexes are also highly valuable, fur- nishing the student, as they do, with fe- licitous illustrations of the text,and much general information. The text seems to be settled with much care and ability. The editions adopted as the basis or referred to as authority are those in the highest repute among scholars. The typographical exeoution is very fine, and this is a high merit. The wretched reprints of foreign editions of the classics, got up in cheap offices, on wretched , with incompetent proof-readers and no editors, to which, until within a very few years, our stu- dents have been universally condemned, have, by taking them young, been as successful in making them uncertain and inaccurate scholars as if that had been one of the main objects of the publishers. School books of all kinds, apleayes AtP ing the worst (as they often are), s be the most carefully printed books we H. Hompurey. difficulty, and which young learn- | From the Rt. Rev. Bishop M‘It- VAINE, President of Kenyon Col- lege, at Gambier, Ohio. I anticipate the greatest benefits to our schools and colleges from the admirable edition of the classics which you are now publishing, under the superintendence and illustrated by the copious and learn- ed notes of Professor Anthon. What your accomplished editor has aimed at in his Horace, Cesar, and other volumes of the series, few can have been much connected with classical institutions in this country without learning to be pre- cisely the one needful thing to their stu- dents. The object is most satisfactorily attained. The needed books we have, . so fur as your series has yet been pub- lished ; and as to what are yet to come, . we have learned from what we have, if I . of one of your authors, may use the wor que a summa virtute summoque in- ie expectanda sunt, expectare. ishing you the most abundant encour- agement in your important enterprise, [ remain your obedient servant, Cuas. P. M‘ILVAINE, From Wittiam A. Duer, LL.D., President of Columbia College, in the City of New-York. From the manner in which this under- taking has been so far executed, as well as from the established character and reputation of Professor Anthon as a scholar, his experience as an tnstructer, and the accuracy and judgment previous- ly evinced by him as an editor and com- mentator, I can entertain no doubt of the success of the enterprise, so far as his editorial labours and your own skill and experience as publishers are concerned ; and I trust that, from the increasing value of classical studies in the esttma- tion of the public, this yuarcious and spir- tted effort to facilitate and promote so im- portant a branch of education will be duly appreciated and liberally rewarded. I remain, gentlemen, Your obedsent servant, WA. Dowa. | 2. ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSiCAL WORKS. TT Letters of Recommendation—continued. From the Rev. B. P. Aypetort,| From the Rev. J. S. Tomitngon, President of the Woodward Col- D.D., President of Augusta Col- lege, at Cincinnati, Ohio. lege, Kentucky. From some personat intance,but| J take this opportunity to acknowledge much more from general reputation, I} the recerpt (sone time gnc) of four vol- formed a very high opinion of Professor | umes of the Classical Series of Profes- Anthon’s abilities to prepare a full series | sor Anthon of New-York ; and, after of Latin and Greek Classics for the; q careful examination of them, I can use of schools, colleges, Gc. Accord- | truly say that I am more than pleased ; ingly, as soon as I could obtain the va- | I am delighted with them. ‘The avowed rious authors edited by him, I procured | object of the publication, that of furnish- them, and, upon a careful examinatiwn, | ing accurate and uniform editions of all was so impressed with their superior | the classical authors used in colleges and character, as t0 introduce them as fast | schools, is one that, in my judgment, has as possible into the different departments | long been a desideratum tn literature, of the institution under my charge. and_J am gratified to find is about to be The various Delphin editions are vest | accomplished, especially by one so entire- good, so far as ancient geography, ag age -| ly equal to the task as Professor An- ogy, usages, c., are concerned ; but in| thon has shown himself to be. ee to critical remarks and grammat- The biographical sketches, commen- ical illustrations they are of little worth ; | taries, and annotations with which the they were, in general, however, the best | yolumes are accompanied, while they re- we had. — flect great credit upon the erudition and But besides being abundantly full and |";esearch of the author, cannot fail to en- clear in everything archeological, Pro- | hance to the student, ina high degree, fessor Anthon has done more, in the | the attractions and value of classical editions of the classical authors prepared | reading. As an evidence of the estimate by him, to unfold the grammatical struc- | we place upon the series, we have hither- ture, and thus throw light upon the mean- | to used it as far as it was attainable, and ing and spirit of the original, than any | shall, with great pleasure, avail ourselves other commentator whom I have consult- | of the opportunity now afforded to adopt ed. It isa striking, and, I think, de- | the whole of it. "Allow me to add, that cistve, proof of their superiority, that the | the neat, tasteful, and, at the same time, students show im their recitations that | substantial style of the mechanical exe- they have read his notes and profit-| cution of the work, fully sustains the ed by them, which they never seemed t0 | well-earned reputation. in that respect, of me to have done when using other edi- | the enterprising establishment whence it hons. emanates. Respectfully, Some trme ago I commenced a careful Your obedient servant, collation of the Greek Grammar of the J. S. ToMLINSON. same author with those of Butmann, Val- py, &c.. making full notes as I went! a along, with the design of preparing are-| ¥rom ALONZO CuUR‘H, D.D.. Pres- view of it at the request of the editor of | ident of the University of Georgia. an extensively circulated periodical, and such was my conviction of its peculiar| As far as time and a press of busi- fitness for the use of schools, that I have | ness would permit, I have examiner since recommended no other to our pu- | these volumes, and am much pleased ls. with them. They are, I think, well I would add that the neatness and | adapted to the wants of, icularly, taste with which Professor Anthon’s | young students, and will, doubt not, classics are got up (though they are far | furnish what has long been a deswdera- cheaper than the Delphin editions) ought | tum in our preparatory schools, viz., to form no small recommendation of | cheap, yet correct editions of the common them. ur students purchase, study, | classics, uccompanied with judicious and preserve them with manifest pleas- | English notes. I do not hesttate to ure ; and whatever has these effects upon | say that, were I engaged in giving in- the pupil, will certainly do much to pro- | struction to youth from these authors, I mote the cause of sound and thorough | should prefer the editions of Professor classical learning. Anthon to any which I have seen. B. P. AYDELOTT. < A. Caurca. a ‘| finely-wrought ee mw owe oe cee ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. Letters of Recommendation—continued, From Jezemian Day, D.D., LL.D., President of Yale Cullege, at New- Haven, Conn. «+++. I estimate highly the impor- tance of furnishing for our schools and colleges accurate and neat editions of the ancient Classics ; and I am much pleas- ed with the general appearance and typ- ographical execution of the specimens which you have given us..... It would be presumptuous in one so little conver- sant with the fair fields of elegant litera- ture to undertake to pass sentence on the oductions of so accom- plished a-stholar as Professor Anthon. .... His Works have a reputation al- ready too well established to need or to recewve additional value from any recom- mendation which I can give..... _ JEREMIAB Day. From the Rev. B. Hatz, D.D., Pres- ident of Geneva College, at Gene- ‘va, N: Yo" companied, by a useful body of commen- tary, maps,’ ceeding ad to their end; and ingly well ada to thei: , and to do credit both ety editor and the publishers. We have specified these ed- tions in the requirements for admission to this college. BENJAMIN Hace. From the Rev. Josern Pxnney, D.D., President of Hamilton Col- lege, at Clinton, N. Y I have examined with much interest and attention Dr. Anthon’s editions of the ancient classics so far as published by I think there can be but one opin- 10N as to the merit of these works, and the advantage to our country of so noble an enterprise. It is not only honoured by. the learning of the editor, and the lity and taste of the publishers, but directly and greatly in the vital interest of the education of our youth. ae — ——— We possess no means of sound mental discipline and cultivated taste that can supersede the relics of Greece and Rome ; and thus to enrich them to the inquiring mind, and to adorn them to the eye of rs —— seas ts a service not like- y to be appreciated as it deserves except those wie hate toiled through the pil ed and careless page of former days. I earnestly that you may be encour- aged greatly to extend these labours. JoszEPH PENNEY. From the Rev. J. M. Matuews, D.D., Chancellor of the New-York University. Professor Anthon has rendered an ; tant service to the cause of learn- ing in this country by his editions of the various Classics ; and I am gratified to see that your valuable press is employed in furnishing them to the public. M. Mataews. From the Rev. D. M‘Conaueny, D.D., President of Washington College, at Washington, Penn. ..... Lhe typographical execution is correct and hatdeome the binding sub- stantial, the notes copious and valuable. All agree, that it is not inuch reading, but thorough reading, which secures knowledge and makes the scholar. To this purpose your edition of the classics is eminently adapted. If well employed by students and instructers, they cannot Sail to make accurate and well-instructed scholars ; and must render the study of Classic authors more interesting and more profitable than it has generally been. I hope that you will find extensive ronage. D. M‘Conaueuy. From the Rev. Atonso Porter, D.D., of Union College, Schenec- tady, N. Y. gauion I have had occasion to exam- ine these editions with some care, and, st would be superfluous to add, with great pleasure. The reputation of Professor Anthon for learning and critical skill, and the sin ular success with which he adapts his labours to the wants of the student, are too well known and too gene erally appreciated to need any recom. mendation. It is- proper, however, to add that these volumes will be used in our classes, and are held in the highest esteem. ALONSO Porte. oe ee ee a ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. From the Rev. E. Nort, D.D., Pres- ident of Union College at Sche- nectady, N. Y. G-c., is an @pprobation, and you are quite at liberty ance of ts execution. Very respectfully, LIPHALET Nott. From the Rev. F. Waytcanp, D.D., President of Brown University at Providence, R. I. J have not been able, owing to the pres- sure of my engagements, to examine the with any of : is thank you for the and res fa saa testimony to the distinguished scholarship of their editor. No ee scholar of our country enjoys a higher reputation, and I know pier in whose labours more decided we may be reposed. ours truly, F. Wisin: From the Rev. Joun P. Dorsin, A.M., President of Dickinson Col- lege at Carlisle, Penn. For some months past my attention has been directed to the series of Classi- cal works now in the course of publication Srom your press, edited by Professor An- thon. I can with con recommend them as the best editions of the several works which have appeared in our coun- try, perhaps tn any country. The mat- ter 1s select, and the notes are copious From Tomas R. INcauis, Esq., President of Jefferson College at St. James, Louisiana. Ihave examined them with atten- thon, and have no hesitation in sayi that I prefer them to any books I seen for the schools for which they are in- Letters of Recommendation—continued. | deserves. tended. The editions by Dr. Anthon cpr yal peg accent Eocene Tuo. R. INGALLS. From C. L. Dosursson, A.M., Presi- dent of Jeffereon College at Wash- ington, Miss. first foe volumes of Anton's Series of st volumes 0 *s Series o Classical Works. They are such as I should Srom the distinguished ed- ttor. ‘* Horace” and “ Sallust” of this gentleman have long been known to me as the best books to be placed in the hands of a student. As acom- excited a great and ial influence ipabpmenied uae Ge ing, and present undertaking itel extend the sphere of that influence. No one so well as a teacher can eciatle the value of uniform editions of the text- books to be used by his classes. The undertaking of ishing a complete series of all those standard works which pga ear hose is a noble one, and stncere it will be completed. With bin 4 pa as the Beau - ises to be, there will be nothing left to desire. Itis be hoped that editor and | publishers will meet with such encourage- ment as their truly valuable undertaking Your obedient servant, C. L. Dusuisson. From the Rev. Joun Lupiow, Pres- ident of the University of Pennsyl- vania at Philadelphia. The object is worthy your en- terprising spirit, and you have been sin- ly fortunate in securing the services of Professor Anthon to direct it to tts completion. The volumes which you have kindly sent me fully sustain the reputation of that distinguished scholar, and afford a sure pledge of what ma ted in those which are to ‘Follow, Most heartily do I recommend your un- dertaking, and sincerely hope it will meet with the encouragement which it richl des erves. With great respect, yours, dc., Joun Louvres, —— y |; ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. President of Williams’ College, at Williamstown, Mass. Professor Anthon has unquestionably done much service to the cause of clas- sical learning in this country by his edi- tions of the Latin classics, given to the public with unusual accuracy and ele- gance from your press. ts Sallust, Cesar, and Cicero cannot fail to find their a a very extensive use, and to render the entrance upon classical studies much more inviting and profitable. uM. OPKINS. From Wivsur Fisk, D.D., Presi- dent of the Wesleyan University, at Middletown, Conn. I am highly gratified to notice that ehee sics under the editorial supervision of that gid irre scholar, Professor Anthon of Columbia Collegé. No man tn our country is better qualified for this office than Professor Antkon. ts show as a classical scholar, it need only be known that an edition of his “‘ Horace” has been published in and the publishers informed me that the entireedi- tion had met with a ready sale ; showing that, notwithstanding the numerous edi- tions of this standard work by the first scholars in England, the credit of the work by our American scholar had car- tedr it successfully through the English market, and that, too, by virtue of its tn- trinsic merit. Your editions of his Ca- sar, Cicero, and Sallust are now before me, and show that there is no falling off Srom the reputation of the edition of Hor- ace. The copious notes and commenta- ries cannot fail to shed a flood of light upon the mind of the young student, and will contribute much, I trust, to foster in the rising generationof scholars a taste for the ancient classics. WiLBurR Fisk. From Sivas Totten, D.D., Presi- dent of Washington College. The volumes which I have examined I entirely approvc, and think them better adapted to the purposes of classical in- struction than any edition of the same lished. . TOTTEN. of the volumes yet to be Letters of Recommendation—continued. From the Rev. M. Hopkins, D.D., | From the President and F‘aculty of tn what estimation he is held in England | authors yet published in this country. The well-known ability of the learned editor admits no doubt of the excellence | and colle, a ee TT ee — Fee a | Miami University, at Oxford, Ohio. These three volumes, enriched by a copious and valuable a | ical notes, and judiciously arranged his- _ torical, geographical, archeological, and legal matters, furnished by so ripe a scholar as Dr. Anthon, are ; well calculated to recommend the series of which they are the commencement. They are well adapted to promote thor- ough classical learning, and are entitled to a high grade of popular favour. By order of the Faculty, R. H. Bisuop, President. From Rorvus Bascock, Jr., D.D., late President of Waterville Col- lege, in Maine. I have examined with considerable care, and with high and unmingled sat- isfaction, your recent edition of Profes- sor Anthon’s Latin Classics. The dis- tinguished editor of Horace has rightly judged, that in order to elevate the range and standard of scholarship in this coun- try, it is requisite to facilitate the thor- ough acquisition of those elementary text-books which are usually first put into the hands of pupils. By the beau- tiful volumes which you have now given to the public from his pen, more has been done to make the student thoroughly ac- tainted with those three prime rs, Cosa Sallust, and Cvrcero, than by any other helps within my knowledge. I need not minutely specify the various points of excellence by which these books are distinguished. Their practical value will immediately be appreciated by teach- ers and learners. Allow me, gentlemen, to tender, fessor Anthon for the very valuable ser- vice he has performed in ard of the great cause of classical learning. May he ’ continue his labours for the public good. Rurus Bascock, JR. through you, my hearty thanks to Pro- From Professor DENNIs, of Haver- ford, Penn. -+*+ [have examined Anthon’s Greek Grammar, and have no hesitation in saying that, as a class-book for schools es, I think it superior to any which I am acquainted. ... Wi. Dewars. other wit atus of crit- —_-——oeoeo ANTHUN'S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. Commendatery Letters—continued. From the Rev. Dr. oh ie dsb President of Rut “ee ‘uilege, at New- kent om" - obrertions sa es men to the study of the and Romen Classics, if is now almost generally vonce:ied that they form if not necessary part of @ education acquaintance with those »in which the greatest masters and | en i these works that he can teach their lrseiee pepr opr eae Orne |: soul of Gaeeancd. olhpet tu thece handle Y youth wi not be left to waste time and . mental energy in unnecessary and dis- ' couraging investigations, but will | ' lighted on their way, and excited to ex- ertion. hical part is correctly ; The typograp and eloganily executed With m: cspchany os ina ss remunera- rept adlsef these vers, onl their te etna aif through the eee I remain, gentlemen, ours very respectfully, PHILip MILLEDOLER. From the Rev. James CarNauHan, D.D., President of the College of New-Jersey, at Princeton, N. J. Having examined in a cursory man- ner your series of Anthon’s C. authors, I add, with pleasure, the testi- mony of my to the numer- ous recomm given by others. Profeseor Anthon’s character a8 a ue sical scholar is a sufficient nip Sethe accuracy of the edition. vy nal ability | a ee oo cece eee editer and the neat and the learned j Marinated Your obedient servant, Jamuts CaRNAHAN. From the Rev. Dr. Batpwin, Presi dent of Wabash College, at Craw: fordsville, Indiana. . [have read Anthon’s Sallust and his " Casar’s Commentaries with much satisfaction. We have adopted the for- mer in course connected eto use his of Tully’s Ora- erence to all others. My Y, ours sincerel Evigu w. BaLDWIN. From the University of St. Louis: Missouri. We have examined them part- ly ourselves, and submitted them for ' farther examination to persons fully ' ampetent to pronounce on their merit. \\". feel happy tn stating, that there has rarer cant ead subject, viz. iy t encomiums are due to Professor Anthon as a scholar and a friend to education, and that the typo- e@eecse graphical execution is not inferior to that of the best schoolbooks published in England and in France... .. Your obedient servants, J. A. ELEt, Rector of St. Louis University. J. B. Esnine, Profes. Ling. From the Rev. Ricnarp H Watt, D.D., Principal of the Preparatory School of Trinity College, Dublin, and Minister of the Chapel Royal. Doctor Anthon is an admira- ble commentator. His work- have a great salehere. And TI shuli («a0 rims te see anything in the Classicil uy | hich comes from his pen. We hore s Cicero, Sallust, ig Recta In gen- i eral circulation m cur schools eee eas . maaan l x ag! Lf oct ae | *e THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY REFERENCE DEPARTMENT This book is under no circumstances to be taken from the Building "FG at 1G 1 f J gfe i PF SS — —_— Pe 2, SAN 2tgi7| JUN s- 64) a ——-- — —-- _ | Io r | il stab oe om ewe hwy -—— —_ a gor 410 Meigs >: he ¥. br SS, “Bebe, ne ha: P é ’ » —t| Wt tM